AU5960499A - Kappa agonist compounds and pharmaceutical formulations thereof - Google Patents

Description

P/00/01 1 Regulation 3.2

AUSTRALIA

Patents Act 1990

S

S.

S

S

.5.S 5*

S

S..

S. S 555555

S

*S

S

*5 I, S *5

ORIGINAL

COMPLETE

SPECIFICATION

STANDARD

PATENT

Invention title: KAPPA AGONIST COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS

THEREOF

The following statement is a full description of this invention, including the best method of performing it kinown to us: dxbm M01 1056965901 109392 22.11.1999 KAPPA AGONIST COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS

THEREOF

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention This invention relates to compounds, to processes of their preparation, to pharmaceutical compositions containing them and to their medical use as agonists at kappa opioid receptors.

15 2. Reported Developments Opium and its derivatives are potent analgesics that also have other pharmacological effects, and exert their effects by interacting with high-affinity receptors.

It has been shown by investigators that there are at least three major opioid receptor 20 types in the central nervous system (hereinafter CNS) and in the periphery. These receptors, known as mu delta and kappa have distinct pharmacological profiles, anatomical distributions and functions. [See, for example: Wood, Neuropharmacology, 21, 487- S 497, 1982; Simon, E. Med. Res. Rev., 11, 357-374, 1991; Lutz et al, J. Recept. Res. 12, 267-286; and Mansour et al, Opioid I, ed. Herz,. A. (Springer, Berlin) pp. 79-106, 1993.] The 8 receptors are abundant in CNS and mediate analgesia, gastrointestinal motility and various hormonal functions. The p receptors bind morphine-like drugs and mediate the opiate phenomena associated with morphine, including analgesia, opiate dependence, cardiovascular and respiratory functions, and several neuroendocrine effects.

The K receptors have a wide distribution in CNS and mediate a spectrum of functions including the modulation of drinking, water balance, food intake, gut motility, temperature control and various endocrine functions. They also produce analgesia. [See, for example: Leander et al, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 234, 463-469, 1985; Morley et al, Peptides 4, 797- 800, 1983; Manzanares et al, Neuroendocrinology 52, 200-205, 1990; and Iyengar et al, J.

Pharmacol. Exp. Ther, 238, 429-436, 1986.] Most clinically used opioid analgesics such as morphine and codeine act as g receptor agonists. These opioids have well-known, undesirable and potentially dangerous dependence forming side effects. Compounds which are K-receptor agonists act as analgesics through interaction with K opioid receptors. The advantage of these agonists over the classical jt receptor agonists, such as morphine, lies in their ability to cause analgesia while being devoid of morphine-like behavioral effects and addiction liability.

A large number of classes of compounds which act as agonists at K opioid receptors have been described in the art including the following illustrative classes of compounds.

U.S. Patent No. 4,065,573 discloses 4 -amino-4-phenylcyclohexane ketal compounds having analgesic activity.

U.S. Patent No. 4,212,878 discloses phenylacetamide derivatives having analgesic properties and reduced physical dependence liability properties, relative to morphine and methadone.

U.S. Patent No. 4,145,435 discloses N-( 2 -amino-cycloaliphatic)-phenylacetamide compounds having analgesic activity and narcotic antagonist activity.

U.S. Patent No. 4,098,904 discloses N-( 2 -amino-cycloaliphatic)-benzoamides and naphthamides useful for relieving pain.

U.S. Patent No. 4,359,476 discloses substituted cycloalkane-amides useful as 15 analgesic and having low abuse liability.

U.S. Patent No. 4,438,130 discloses 1-oxa-, aza- and thia-spirocyclic compounds having analgesic activity, low physical dependence and abuse liability properties and little S* dysphoric inducing properties.

U.S. Patent No. 4,663,343 discloses substituted naphthalenyloxy-1,2diaminocyclohexyl amides as analgesics.

o• U.S. Patent No. 4,906,655 discloses 1, 2 -cyclohexylaminoaryl amides having high Skappa-opioid affinity, selectivity and potency and useful as analgesics, diuretics, antiinflammatory and psychotherapeutic agents.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Compounds having kappa opioid agonist activity, compositions containing them and method of using them as analgesics are provided.

In its compound aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula II, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

The compounds of Formula (II) have the following structure: 0* SnAr Ar

II

wherein n 1-3;

R

1 and R 2 are independently

CH

3 where m 4-8, -CH 2

CH(OH)(CH

2 2

-CH

2

CH(F)(CH

2 2 -(CH2)20(CH2)2-; or -(CH 2 2

CH=CHCH

2 Ar unsubstituted or mono-, or di-substituted phenyl wherein said substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, OCH 3 S0 2

CH

3

CF

3 amino,alkyl, and 3,4-dichloro; benzothiophenyl; benzofuranyl; naphthyl: diphenyl methyl; or 9-fluorene;

X

4 and X 5 are independently -OP(O)(O13n) 2 -CO 2 H; -SO 3 H; -SO 3 H; -O(CH 2

),,CO

2

H;

-NHSO

2

CH

3

-CONH(CH

2

),CO

2 H; or -SO 2

NH(CH

2 )sCO 2 H; wherein s or X 4 and X 5 are independently

X

6 0(t 0 A N N t C0 2 H orNNHR 5 o H 4or to 0ItX 6

X

6 0 S2 NH R 4H t So. .X wherein t 1-20 -H or -Ac

*X

6

-CO

2 H; -NHSO 2

CH

3 -NHP(O)(OBn) 2

-NHP(O)(OH)

2 -OP(O)(OBn) 2 or S

-OP(O)(OH)

2 Preferably, the compound of Formula 11 is selected from the group consisting of: 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-nethyl.N. 1-[1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(O-2-acetic acid)hydroxy-2-( I -pyrrolidinvflnanhthvl ]acetamide;. ,4-dichloropeny1)=

-NT-

methyl-N- I -1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydro-7-(O-2-acetic acid)-hydroxy-2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl.N-.1- [1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-methanesulfonamido)-amino-2.( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; 2 3 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl.N-1- 1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(N-methanesufonamido-amino-2.( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methylbN-.1- [1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(N-2-acetic acid)-carboxamido-2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-1- [1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydro-5-(N-2-acetic acid)-sulfonamido-2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-1- 1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-2-acetic acid)-carboxamido-.2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; and 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-.1- 1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-2-acetic acid)-sulfonamido-2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide.

Preferably, the compound of Formula 11 is selected from the group consisting of: 2-1{ 7 1 4 -dichlorophenyacetamidoNmethylamino)2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)- 1,2,3 4 -tetrahydronaphthoxy] I acetic acid; 2 2 -Diphenyl-N-methyl-N[(±)trans2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-methoxy- 1,2,3,4tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl] acetamide; 2 2 -Diphenyl-N-methybN.(±)trans2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-hydroxy- I ,2,3 ,4tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl] acetamide; 2 2 -Nitro- 4 ,5-dichlorophenyNmethy-N[(±)trans2-(I -pyrrolidinyl)-7-nitro- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichloropheny)-NmethylN[(±)trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-nitro- 1,2,3,4tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl] acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)Nmethyl1N-[(±)-trans-2-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-amino- 1 2 ,3,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2 4 -Methylsulfonylphenyl)NmethylN.[(±)trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-nitroa.20 1,2,3 4 -tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yljacetamide; 2 3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-N-methylpN 1 -pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N,N-bis-(tbutoxycarbonylmethyl)-aminol. 1,2,3 4 -tetrahvdronaphth-I yl Iacetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N f 1 -pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N,N-bis- (carboxymethyl)amino].1 2 ,3,4-tetrahydronaphth- l-yl }acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-Nmethyl-N [+]-trans-2- [1-pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N,N-bis- (ethoxycarbonylmethyl)amino]..1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth-l-yl} acetamide; 2-(3 4 -DichlorophenyNmethylN[(±)-trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-(Ndiethylphosphoramidato-amino)- I 2 ,3,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichloropheny1)-N-methy1.N.. f 1 -pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N-2- (diethylphosphoryl)ethylbamino.. 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- Il-yl I acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-N-methylN[(±)trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-6-methoxy-7- (N-benzyl-N-methylaminosulfonyl). 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-N-methylN[(±)-trans-2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-(N-benzy-Nmethylaminosulfonyl)- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(2-Nitro-4,5 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methylN[(±)trans-2.{ -pyrrolidinyl)-indan- 1 yl]acetamide; 2 2 -Nitro- 4 -trifluoromethylphenyl)Nmethyl-N-[(±)trans.2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)indan-1I-yl]acetamide; 2 2 -Dipheny1-N-methy1-N-[(±)-trans-2. 1-pyrrolidinyl)-indan-1I-yl]acetamide; and 2 4 -Methylsulfonylphenyl)NmethylN(±)-trans-2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-indan- 1 yl]acetamide.

According to a second aspect of the invention, there is provided a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula 11 in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

According to a third aspect of the invention, there is provided a method of treating hyperalgesia in a patient comprising administering to said patient an effective S* amount of a compound of Formula 11 or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula 11.

According to afourth aspect of the invention there i rvddapamcuia composition comprising a compound of Formula 11 and an antibiotic, antiviral, antifungal, anti-inflammatory agent or a mixture thereof in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Peripherally-acting K agonists can be prepared by the attachment of polar groups to non-peptide K opioid receptor selective agonists, such as the arylacetamides. In designing the peripherally-acting ligands, the introduction of the polar groups may result in either retention or enhancement of antinociceptive potency and selectivity and also may increase the polarity of the ligand sufficient to reduce or eliminate CNS penetration across the blood-brain barrier (BBB). Thus, the identity and the positioning of the polar group(s) are important.

Using the prototypic arylacetamide, U50,488, as an example, the arylacetamide pharmacophore can be divided into three regions: the aromatic region, the central region, and the amine region. All three regions represent potential positions for the attachment of polar groups.

Scentral region MeN

N

U 8 amine region

CI

aromatic region Compounds of formula of the present invention are made as follows.

A series of novel compounds were made based on the class of arylacetamides reported by Glaxo Med. Chem. 1993, 36, 2075). Specifcally, compound 1 can be deprotected to yield intermediate 2, which can be derivatized by the attachment of a variety of polar groups (Scheme 1).

f

R

N

N

Glaxo series Cl The 3'-substituted series can be prepared via Scheme 2. The reduction of the Schiff base intermediate formed during the cyclization to 6 is expected to be stereoselective due to the directing effect of the neighboring hydroxymethyl group. Both intermediates 11 and 12 can be derivatized to confer peripheral selectivity.

The 5'-substituted series can be prepared via Schemes 3 and 4. Starting from N-t- Boc-O-MEM-D-serine, the series can be prepared, and starting from from N-t-Boc-O- MEM-L-serine allows the preparation of the series.

Scheme 1

S

CO

2 Me

I

N,

N

R

2 nAr

O"N-^

n HBr AcOH

H

NR

40 A r Analogs sho-, in formula I.

wherein Ar, RI, R 2 and n are defined in formula I.

!cneme z..

~OH

-7 H 1)MgB<'OMEM BocN

CO

2 Me 2)TFA Ph 3 11 H N-Boc-Gly HN OMEM

DCC

Ph

CO

2 Me

:IICICO

2 Me IEM

LAH

9*9* 9*9* 99..

.9 9* 9 9.

.9 9 9.

9 9 9 99 9 9.

8 1) FH 2 Pd/C 2) Ar(CH 2 ),,COCl C0 2 Me 1 l)(COCl) 2 I DMSO, Et 3

N

OH 2)NaBH 3

CN

n NHR 1

R

2

-N-R,

I

R2

CO

2 Me OH

N

N

Ar 1)n Ar *9 *9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 .9 1) DEAD

HN

3 Ph 3

P

2) H 2 Pd/C Analogs shown in formula 1.

CO

2 Me NH2

IA

Ar 12 wherein Ar, RI, R 2 and n are as defined in formula 1.

Scheme 3.

1--OMEM BocHN C0 2

H

,--OH

HN CO 2 Me Ph DCC 0 CO 2 Me -u..-BocHN )f'H NKH a a

A

a a a a a a a. a

CO

2 Me H

HH

18 Ph 17 Ph S1) H12, Pd/C 2) Ar(CH 2 ).COCl

CO

2 Me

CO

2 Me H I H I MeOH, SOC1 2 2) NH 3 H H MEM O 7

N

LAH N ,O

KH

16 Ph

N-

CO

2 Me H I Ho_

N

me 2) Ar q~n 0- 6- Ar (see Scheme 2) Ar 19 (see Sche Analogs shown in formula I (see Scheme 2)

CO

2 Me H I

N,

Ar wherein Ar. Ri. and n are as defined in formula 1.

Scheme 4.

CO

2 Me H

I

fOMEM BocHN C0 2

H+

23 11,1H

HO

HN

CO

2 Me (see Schemes 2 3) SPh 14

R,

(see Scheme 2) ccc.

Case ccc.

S

ccc.

cc Re S @6ec coca cc cc a cc C 0 ccc a ccc.

C C Cc C ccc.

Ce cc c c tee...

C a ccc cc.

Re cc cc c

S

cc C cc cc Analogs shown in formnula 1.

CO

2 Me H I

N

I.I

wherein Ar, RI, R 2 and n are as defined in formula 1.

-11- Using Schemes 1-4 the following example compounds are made.

-Intermediate 3 can be treated with t-butyl bromoacetate and deprotected to produce 1-( 3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)acetyl-2R( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-methyl]piperazinyl acetic acid (26).

-Intermediate 3 can be reacted with methane sulfonyl chloride to produce [1 3 4 -Dichloropheny)acetyl4methanesulfonyl2R-( 1-pyrrolidinyl)methyl]piperazine (27).

-Intermediate 3 can be coupled to N-t-Boc-L-aspartic acid-j3-benzyl ester and deprotected to produce [4-S-Aspartic acid-a-amido- 1-( 3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)acetyl-2R{1 pyrrolidinyl)methyl]piperazine (28).

-Intermediate 11 can be treated with t-butyl bromoacetate, and deprotected to produce Methyl-[2R-(O-2-acetic acid)hydroxymethyk.4..(3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetylb3R.( 1pyrrolidinyl)methyl].1 -piperazinecarboxylate (29).

-Intermediate 11 can be coupled to to N-t-Boc-L-aspartic ai-bezlester and deprotected dichlorophenyl)acetyl..3R-( 1-pyrrolidinyl)methyl]-1I-piperazinecarboxylate 4* -Intermediate 12 can be treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to produce Methyl-[4-(3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyb2R-(Nmethanesulfonamido)aminomethyl 3R-( 1pyrrolidinyl)methyl]- 1 -piperazinecarboxylate (31).

*25 -Intermnediate 12 can be coupled to 2 S-isothiocyanato-succinic acid-dibenzyl ester and deprotected to yield Methyl- 4 -dichlorophenyl]acetyl..3R-[ 1-pyrrolidinyl]methyl-2R-[N-.

(succinic acid- 2 S-thioureido)]aminomethyl} -1-piperazinecarboxylate (32).

-Intermediate 21 can be treated with t-butyl bromoacetate and deprotected to produce Methyl-[2S-(O-2-acetic acid)hydroxymethyl-4-(3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyl...R( 1pyrrolidinyl)methyl]-I1 -piperazinecarboxylate (33).

-Intermediate 21 can be coupled to to N-t-Boc-L-aspartic acid-b-benzyl ester and deprotec ted to produce Methyl-[2S-(O..S-.aspartic acid-a-acetyl)hydroxymethyl-4(3 ,4dichlorophenyl)acetyl.sR-( 1-pyrrolidinyl)methyl]-l1-piperazinecarboxylate (34).

-Intermediate 22 can be treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to produce -12- Methyl-[4-(3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyl..2S-{N..methanesulfonamido)aminomethyl 5R-(I1 pyrrolidinyl)methyl]-l1-piperazinecarboxylate -Intermediate 22 can be coupled to 2 S-isothiocyanato-succinic acid-dibenzyl ester and deprotected to yield Methyl- ,4-dichlorophenyl]acetyl.5R [1 -pyrrolidinyl]methyb2S-N- (succinic acid- 2 S-thioureidoyjaminomethyl} -1-piperazinecarboxylate (36).

-The 2R isomers of 33-3 4 and 35-36 can be prepared from intermediates 24 and respectively to produce Methyl-[2R-(O-2-acetic acid)hydroxymethylb4(3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyl.5R-( pyrrolidinyl)methyl]-l1-piperazinecarboxylate (37).

Methyl-[2R-(O-S-aspartic acid-a-acetyl)hydroxymethyl4(3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyl..5R( 1pyrrolidinyl)methyl] 1I -piperazinecarboxylate (38).

Methyl- [4-(3,4dclrpeylaey-R(-mtaeufnmioaioehl5R( 1pyrrolidinyl)methyl]- 1-piperazinecarboxylate (39).

Methyl- 3 4 -dichlorophenyl]acetyl..5R-[ 1-pyrrolidinyl]methyl-2R[N(succi 1 ic acid-2Sthioureido)] aminomethyl -1 -piperazinecarboxylate :.20 The corresponding structural formulas are shown hereunder.

0 Me H.IC2 OH r NH2

CO

2 Me NNN) N) H

N

*r li I IA1I "l"'l NNN

N

26 C1 27 CI l'" -13-

CO

2 Me N0~

CO

2 Me

CO

2 Me H I

ND

C0 2 H 0 C0 2

H

HN- HN N- F- N N HO 2 C2 N/ HO2C a/44/HC'

M

e CI 36 CI Cl Ci

CO

2 Me CO 2 Me HI NHH I 0 0 C0 2 Me S C0 2 Me H I H I1 I H NN) N CO2H N N 'I O H2C t H

H

o0;1 39 CI 401 kfoCl CI

CI

Compounds of formula II of the present invention are made by peripheralization by substitutions of the benzo portion of the tetrahydronaphthyl ring of DuPont series of compounds with polar groups.

compounds with polar groups.

CI

0 MeNN 8 6 3 4 DuPont series Starting material or precursors of the starting material are commercially available and thus allows regiospecific substitutions of the tetrahydronaphthyl ring (Scheme While hydroxytetralone, 6-hydroxytetralone, 7-hydroxytetralone, and 7-aminotetralone derivatives are readily available, 5-aminotetralone could be prepared from 5-hydroxytetralone Org.

.Chem. 1972, 37, 3570).

The tetralone derivatives can be converted to dihydronaphthyl derivatives and subjected to chemistry similar to that employed in the preparation of U50,488 derivatives.

10 The resulting compounds are racemic mixtures that can be derivatized to confer peripheral selectivity. If necessary, the final compounds or one of the intermediates can be resolved to test both enantiomers.

Scheme MeO 41 42 OMe S O 0 SH2N 1) phthalic anhydride PhtN C0 2H 2) A1C, 43 44 NaOH N\ I 1) KNH 2 (EtO) 2 POCl K(s)-NH 3 (l) 2) phthalic OH OP(0)(OEt) 2 anhydride NPht 6I A'7 -16- Neheme 0.

1) NaBH 4 41,42,44,47 or other 2) pTsOH starting material

X

4 1) NBS 2) NR 1

R

2 48, X 5

X

4 =-OMe 49, X 5 =-OMe, X 4

=-H

X

5 -NPht, X 4

-H

51, X 5

X

4 -NPht

X

5

X

4 -OMe

X

5 -OMe, X 4

-H

X

5 -NPht, X 4

-H

X

5

X

4 -NPht 0 x 5 MeN)I>.4

A

MsCl MeNH 2 a. S Ar(CH 2 ),COCl Ar, RI, R 2 and n are as defined in formula 11 NH Me

X

4

X

5

X

4 OMe

X

5 =-OMe, X 4

-H

X

5 -NPht, X 4

=-H

X

5

X

4 -NPht

X

5

X

4 -OMe

X

5 -OMe, X 4

-H

X

5 -NPht, X 4

-H

X

5

X

4 -NPht BBr o x 5 MHNLtI.A n gN-RI Ri 1 diazonium chemistry for 66 and 67 (see Scheme 7) EN

-R

X

5

X

4

-OH

X

5 -OH, X 4

-H

X

5

-NH

2

X

4

-H

X

5

X

4

-NH

2

A

fo

X

5

X

4

=-CO

2

H

X

5

X

4

-SO

2

CI

X

5

-CO

2 H, X 4

-H

X

5

-SO

2 Cl, X 4

-H

nalogs as defined in irmula 11.

Scheme 1) NaNO 2

H

2 S0 4 (aq) ArNH 2 ArOH 1) NaNO 2

KI

ArNH 2

ROH

Ni(C 0)4 ArCO 2

R

1) NaNO 2 ArNH 2 CuCN

AC

83 H30+ ArCO 2

H

84

S

4H2 ArCH 2

NH

2 ArN 2

'BF

4

CO

Pd(OAc) 2 NaOAc ArCOOH 84 ArSO 2

CI

86 ArN 2

+BF

4 +S CU1

HCI

81, 82, 84, 85, 86 -a Analogs shown in formnulas IT-IV Ar- MeN) Ar 0 n 0 MeHN~Ar orWR or R4_ wherein RI, R 2 and n are as defined in formula 1.

-18- Following the procedure shown in Schemes 5-7, the following example compounds are prepared.

-Intermnediate can be treated with t-butyl bromoacetate and deprotected to produce 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N..methyl.N 1-[1,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(O-2..acetic acid)-hydroxy-2- (1 -pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide (72).

-Intermediate can be treated with t-butyl bromoacetate and deprotected to produce 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-i ,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(O-2-acetic acid)-hydroxy-2- (1 -pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide (73).

-Intermediate can be treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to produce 4 -dichlorophenyl)Nmethyl-N 1 ,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-methanesulfonamido)amino-2-(1 -pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide (74).

-Intermnediate can be treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to produce 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methy..N 1 1,2,3 4 amino-2-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide -Intermediate can be treated with glycine benzyl ester and deprotected to produce 4 -dichlorophenyl)Nmethyl-N 1-[i 2 3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(N-2-acetic acid)carboxamido-2-( l-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide (76).

-Intermediate can be treated with glycine benzyl ester and deprotected to produce 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N 1-[i ,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(N-2-.acetic acid)x. sulfonamido-2-(l -pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide (77).

-Intermnediate can be treated with glycine benzyl ester and deprotected to produce 2 3 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N..methyl.N 1-[1 2 3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-2-acetic acid)carboxamido-2-( l-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide (78).

-Intermediate can be treated with glycine benzyl ester and deprotected to produce 2 3 4 -dichlorophenyl).Nmethyl.N.. ,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-2-acetic acid)sulfonamido-2-( l-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyllacetamide (79).

-19- ,C1 X 5

X

4 =OCH2CO 2

H

X

5

-OCH

2

CO

2 H, X 4

-H

X

5

=-NHSO

2 Me, X 4

-H

X

5

X

4

-NHSO

2 Me

X

5

X

4

-CONHCH

2 CO2H

X

5

X

4

-SO

2

NHCH

2

CO

2

H

X

5

-CONHCH

2 CO2H, X 2 4= -H

X

5

SO

2

NHCH

2

CO

2 H, X 4

-H

The compounds of formula III of the present invention are prepared by substituting the central phenyl ring with polar groups.

00@ co W~e (111) wherein Ar, R I, R 2

X

7 and n are defined as in formula Ill.

6 0 4e 0e

C

C

*0 C C; C C 9* Compound 80 and analogues undergo a variety of diazonium-involving reactions for the attachment of polar groups (Scheme 7).

NH

2

CH

3 Using the procedure shown in Scheme 7, the following compounds are made.

-Intermnediate 81 can be treated with dibenzyl phosphoryl chloride followed by deprotection to produce 2-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N- 1-3 -(O-phosphoryl)hydroxyphenyl-2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)ethyl I acetamide (87).

-Intermediate 85 can be coupled to methanesulfonyl chloride to produce 2-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N- I 1- [3 -(N-methanesulfonamido)aminomethyl]phenylp2 (1 -pyrrolidinyl)ethyl Iacetamide (88).

-Intermediate 85 can be coupled to 2S-isothiocyanato succinic acid and deprotected to produce 2-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N- I 1 -(N-succinic acid-2Sthioureido)aminomethyljphenyl-2-( 1-pyrrolidinyl)ethyl I acetamide (89).

-Intermediate 80 can be treated with dibenzyl phosphoryl chloride followed by deprotection to produce 2-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N- {1 -3-(N-phosphoramido)aminophenyl-2-( 1pyrrolidinyl)ethyllacetamide

R

87, R NO02\ 87, R -0P0 3

H

2 Ne 7'CI C1 The compounds of formula IV may be prepared by Scheme 8.

-21- Scheme 8.

S~NHMe R411 I1 C

R

3 K2 arylacetyl chloride

I

R2 92, X 2, 3, or 4 NO 2 93, X= 2, 3, or 4 OH 94, X dihalo and nitro substituted *e *u

I

0 N I -X diazonium N-

R

4 111 R3 I chemistry R2 for 96 and 97 (see Scheme 7) 98, X 2, 3, or 4 SO 2

CI

99, X 3, or 4 CO 2

H,

100, X dihalo and SO 2 CI substituted 101, X dihalo and CO 2 H substituted 102, X 3, or 4 CH 2

NH

2 103, X dihalo and CH2NH 2 substituted Analogs 95, X 2, 3, or 4 OH 96, X 2, 3, or 4 NH 2 97, X dihalo and NH 2 substituted wherein R 1

R

2

R

3 and R 4 are defined in formulas III and IV.

The diamino intermediate 91 Med. Chem. 1990, 33, 286) can be coupled to different regioisomers of nitrophenylacetic acid, which are all commercially available.

Reduction of the nitro group provides an amino group for the attachment of polar groups.

Alternatively, the amino intermediates 95-97 readily undergo diazonium chemistry that converts the amino groups to carboxyl and sulfonyl chloride groups. This allows the polar groups to be attached via different linkers.

I

Following the procedure in Scheme 8, the following compounds are made.

-Intermediate 96 can be treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to produce (-)-(5a,7a,8B)-N-methyl-N-[7-( -pyrrolidinyl) -oxaspiro-[4,5]dec-8-yl]-3-(Nmethanesulfonamido)aminophenylacetamide (104).

-Intermediate 98 can be coupled to glycine benzyl ester and deprotected to yield (-)-(5c,7ca,8B)-N-methyl-N-[7-(1-pyrrolidinyl)-l-oxaspiro-[4,5]dec-8-yl]- 3 -(N-2-acetic acid)sulfonamidophenylacetamide (105).

-Intermediate 99 can be coupled to glycine benzyl ester and deprotected to yield 5 a ,7a,8B)-N-methyl-N-[7-( -pyrrolidinyl)-l-oxaspiro-[4,5]dec-8-yl]-3-(N-2-acetic acid)carboxamidophenylacetamide (106).

Me 0 X 104, X NHSO 2 CH3, 105, X SO 2

NHCH

2

CO

2

H

N 106, X CONHCH2C0 2

H

Compounds of the above formulas may have one or more asymmetric carbon atoms.

Pure sterochemically isomeric forms of the above compounds may be obtained, and diastereoisomers isolated by physical separation methods, including, but not limited to crystallization and chromatographic methods. Cis and trans diasteriomeric racemates may be further resolved into their isomers. If separated, active isomers may be identified by their activity. Such purification is not, however, necessary for preparation of the compositions or practice ofJ th methods herein.

As used herein, the compounds provided herein also include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids and esters thereof, stereoisomers, and also metabolites or prodrugs thereof that possess activity as analgesics but do not cause substantial CNS effects when administered or applied. Metabolites include any compound that is produced upon administration of the compound and metabolism thereof.

More detailed preparations of the compounds of the present invention follow.

Compounds of Formula I Preparatory for the compounds of formula 1, the following intermediates were prepared.

Computing...

H

2 N C0 2

H

MeOH, benzaldehyde NaCNBH 3 24 Hr N~ N C0 2 H (1)

H

iMeOH, HC1(g) Reflux, 18 Hr

,-OH

S N COMe H 4 a. a a.

a a 4 a. 4 pa a aaa...

a 4a 4 a a 4 4.

NHBOC

BnO CO 2 Me 0N (Ph BOC-D-Ser(OBzl)OH DCC, HOBt, CH 2

CI

2 I. CHCI 3 HCI(g) 2. NaHCO 3

H

2 0

H

BnO N 0 0 N COH KPh LiAIH 4

/THF

Reflux, 24 Hr BnO NCH 3 CN, 00 C BnO NOM NC1CO 2 Me N )NOH Ph K Ph 1. (COCI) 2

DMSO

NMM

2. NaCNBH 3 pyrrolidine

CO

2 Me CDI, CH 2

CI

2 HO N 3,4-dichioro-

N

phenylacetic acid H

CO

2 Me Pd/C BnO -*IN

H

2 (50 psi) N Ph (7) -24- N-Benzvl-D-serine(1)': To a mixture of D-serine (25.0 g, 0.237 mol) and 200 mL anhydrous methanol was added sodium cyanoborohydride (11.95 g, 0.190 mol), while maintaining the temperature at 0°C with an ice bath. Then, benzaldehyde (26.5 mL, 0.261 mol) was added to the reaction flask, dropwise, at 300C. The mixture was stirred for 60 Hr. at room temperature. Then, the mixture was filtered and rinsed with methanol (50 mL). The white solid was dried in a vacuum oven at 40 0 C and 10 mmHg over 2 nights: 24.5 g. The filtrate was retained and the solvent was evaporated. This oil was passed through a silica gel column (10% MeOH/CH 2

CI

2 and 3.4 g of the desired compound was isolated. The total amount of the product was 27.9g (60.0 yield). 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 6 3.25 1H, CH), 3.85 2H, CH 2 4.11 2H, benzylic CH 2 7.45-7.53 5H, ArH).

Ref.

Ohfune, Kurokawa, Higuichi, Saito, Hashimoto, Tanaka, T. An efficient one-step reductive N-monoalkyation of a-amino acids. Chemistry Letters. 1984, 441-444.

N-Benzyl-D-serine methyl ester(2): Hydrogen chloride (gas) was bubbled into anhydrous methanol for 10 minutes. Then, the solution was allowed to cool to room temperature. Then, N-benzyl-D-serine (24.6 gm, 0.126 mol) was added to the reaction flask and refluxed over 20 night under dry nitrogen. Then, the solvent was evaporated and dissolved in dichloromethane S (200 mL), and washed with a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate. The dichloromethane layer was dried with magnesium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated. (23 gm, 87.2 yield). 'H NMR (CDC13) 6 3.41 1H, CH), 3.52-3.80 (dd, 2H, benzylic 3.69 3H, OMe), 7.27 5H, ArH).

N-(1,1 -Dimethylethoxv)carbonvl-D-Ser-(O-Bzl)-N-benzvl-D-Ser-OMe To a solution of N-boc-D-serine-(O-bzl)OH (15 g, 50.76 mmol) in anhydryous dichloromethane (200 mL) was added HOBt (7.54 g, 55.8 mmol) at 0 C under dry nitrogen. Then, DCC (11.5 g, 55.7 30 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was added dropwise to the reaction flask. Then, this mixture was stirred for 1 Hr. Then, N-benzyl-D-serine-OMe (10 g, 47.8 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was added dropwise to the reaction flask. Then, stirred for 4 days.

Then, filtered and rinsed with dichloromethane (100ml). The white precipitate was DCU and HOBt. The filtrate was evaporated and re-dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 mL). Then, this was allowed to precipitate, overnight more DCU. This was filtered and rinsed with ethyl acetate. Then, this was isolated on a silica gel column (20% ethyl acetate/ hexanes): an oil- 17.3g, 74.3% yield. 'H NMR (CDCI 3 8 1.43 9H, t-Bu), 3.54 1H, OH), 3.72 3H, OMe), 3.75 (dd, 2H, CH 2 3.79 (dd, 2H, CH 2 4.41 2H, CH2 benzylic), 4.43 2H, CH 2 benzylic), 7 2 7-7.30(m, 1 OH, ArH).

2 R,5R)- 2 -((Benzylox)methl-5- droxvmethvl).4-(phenylmethl).3,6-piperazine dione(4) 2 Into anhydrous chloroform (300 mL) was bubbled hydrogen chloride (gas). Then, the dipeptide (13.5 g, 27.7 mmol) in chloroform (100 ml) was added to the reaction flask.

The flask was stoppered and stirred for 64 Hr. Then, a saturated solution (100 ml) of sodium bicarbonate was added and stirred vigorously for 48 Hr. The cyclization was completed at this point. The organic layer was separated from the aqueous layer in a 1L separatory funnel.

The product was isolated from a silica gel column, eluting with dichloromethane-methanol- 0.88 ammonia (96:2:2) to give as an amorphous solid (6.0 g, 61.1% yield). 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 3.72-3.96 7H), 3.97-5.24 (dd, 2H, CH 2 benzylic), 4.45 (dd, 2H, CH 2 benzylic), 7.15-7.30 10H, ArH); MS (FAB) m/e 355 Ref.

Williams, T. Ciccarone, T. MacTough, S. C. and et al. 2-Substituted piperazines as constrained amino acids. J. Med Chem. 1996, 39, 1345-1348.

2 -((Benzvloxy)methvl)-4-(phenylmethyl)-5-piperazinemethanol(5): A suspension of lithium aluminum hydride (0.9 g, 23.7 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (40 mL) was treated with a solution of piperazinedione 4 (2.1 g, 5.92 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (200 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 24 Hr and then, stirred at room temperature for 12 Hr. Water (10 ml) was added followed by aqueous sodium hydroxide (IN, 10 mL) and water (10 mL). The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was evaporated to give 5 (1.67 g, 86.4% yield) as a viscous oil. 'H NMR (CDC13) 6 2.58 (dd, 2H, CH 2 2.61 (t, 1H, OH), 3.10 (dd, 2H, CH 2 3.25 (dd, 2H, CH 2 3.50 (dd, 2H, CH2), 3.74 2H, CH 2 4.41 20 (dd, 2H, CH 2 benzylic), 7.20-7.30 10H, ArH).

(2S,5S)-Methl 2 -[(Benzvloxy)methyll-5-(hydroxvmethyl)-4-(phenylmethyl)- 1 iperazine carboxylate A solution of 5 (1.67 g, 5.11 mmol.) in acetonitrile (20 mL) was treated with a solution of methyl chloroformate (0.532 g, 5.63 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) at 0OC.

The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 30 min., and then aqueous sodium carbonate solution (15 mL) was added. The organic solvent was removed, and the aqueous residue was extracted with chloroform (3x10 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with aqueous sodium carbonate solution (10 mL), dried, and evaporated to give 6 30 (1.52 g, 77.3% yield) as an oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 6 2.54 (dd, 2H, CH2), 2.45 1H, OH), 2.72 (dd, 2H, CH2), 3.51 (dd, 2H, CH2), 3.67 (dd, 2H, CH 2 3.69 3H, OMe), 3.81 (dd, 2H, CH 2 4.44 (dd, 2H, CH 2 benzylic), 7.17-7.31 (10H, ArH).

(2S,5S)-Methyl 2-r(Benzvloxy)methyll-5-r(1-pvrrolidinvl)methyll-4-(phenylmethyl- 1piperazinecarboxylate(7)3 A solution of oxalyl chloride (0.545 mL, 6.24 mmol in dichloromethane (10 mL) at -65 0 C was treated with a solution of dimethyl sulfoxide (1.14 mL, 16.0 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 ml) maintaining the reaction temperature below 0 C. The mixture was stirred at -70 °C for 10 min, and then a solution of the piperazinemethanol 2 g, 5.19 mmol) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added at such a rate that the reaction temperature was maintained below -65 0 C. The reaction mixture was stirred at -65 0 C for 3 Hr, and a solution of N-methylmorpholine (1.42 mL, 12.91 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at -20 °C for 45 min and then washed with ice-cold hydrochloric acid (0.01 N, 100mL and 50mL), dried, evaporated, and placed on a high vacuum pump overnight. The residue was dissolved in methanol (10 mL) and was added to a solution ofpyrrolidine (0.91 mL, 10.94 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) at oC, which had been adjusted to pH 6.0 by the addition of methanolic hydrogen chloride.

-26- Sodium cyanoborohydride (0.67 g, 10.66 mmol) and 4-A molecular sieves (0.66 g) were added, and the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 18 Hr. The mixture was filtered, and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in aqueous sodium carbonate (1M, 25mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (2x50 mL). The product was isolated from a silica gel column, eluting with dichloromethane-methanol (98:2) to give 1.0 g, 23.0 yield). 1H NMR (CDC1 3 6 1.75 4H, CH 2

CH

2 2.46 3H), 2.48 (m, 4H, CH2CH 2 2.55 (dd, 2H, CH 2 2.70-2.85 3H), 3.41 (dd, 2H, CH 2 3.69 3H, OMe), 4.10 1H), 4.20 1H), 4.41 (dd, 2H, CH 2 benzylic), 7.10-7.31 10H, ArH); MS (FAB) m/e 438 Naylor, Judd, D. Lloyd, J. Scopes, D. I. Hayes, A. Birch, P. J. A potent new class of k- Receptor agonist: 4-subtituted 1-(arylacetyl)-2-[(dialkylamino)methyl] piperazines. J. Med. Chem. 1993, 36, 2075-2083.

(2S,5S)-Methyl 2 -(Hydroxvmethyl)-5-(1 -prrolidinyl)methyl-- piperazine carboxylate(8): A solution of 7 (0.

2 5g, 0.571mmol) in ethanol (200 mL) was hydrogenated over palladium on carbon (Degussa type E101 NE/W) at 50 psi for 7 days. Then, filtered through celite and filtrate was evaporated. (0.13 g, 0.5 mmol: 87% yield).

*T (2S,5S)-Methyl 4-(3,4 Dichlorophenvl)acetyll-2-(hydroxy)methyl 5(1 volidinyl)methll-1-piperazinecarboxylate(9): To a solution of carbonyldiimiazole (0.20 g, 1.26 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added portionwise 3,4 dichlorophenylacetic acid 0.25 g, 1.26 mmol) and the resulting solution stirred under nitrogen for 1 Hr, at room temperature. A solution of 8 (0.13g, 0.5 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added and the mixture at room temperature for 18 Hr. The reaction mixture was washed with sodium carbonate solution (2 N, 2 x 10 mL), dried, and 30 evaporated to give a viscous oil. This material was dissolved in a mixture of tetrahydrofuran mL) and water (5 mL) and treated with lithium hydroxide (42 mg, 1.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was removed, and the aqueous residue was extracted with dichloromethane (3 x mL). The combined organic extracts were dried and evaporated to give a colorless gum which was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel, eluting with ethyl acetatemethanol (40:1) to give 9 (155 mg, 70 as a colorless foam.

Utilizing the above-denoted intermediates, the following compounds were prepared.

-27- Chiral Compounds Ph CD N No N

NN

Pd/C. H 2 RXlbase Cl ci ci (R)-3 *0 S Example 1 10* S 4 (Phenvlmethyl1..I[(34dichlorophenvl)ace

I(

pvrrolidinylbmethylPiperazine hydrochloride HC1 ADL-01-0143-6 The compound HCl was prepared following the literature procedure in 54% yield; mp, 168-170'C; 1H- NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 6 1.65 (4H, in), 1.95-3.00 (6H, in), 3.10- 3.80 (9H, in), 4.35 (1H, in), 4.70 (lH, mn), 7.00 (1H, mn), 7.30 (7H, in); MIS (FAB) 448 (M Anal. Calcd for C24H 29

C

2

N

3 0.2HCl.H 2 0: C, 53.64; H, 6.19; N, 7.82. Found: C, 53.69; H, 5.88; N, 7.49.

Example 2 hydrochloride f(R)-2HCIJ ADL-01-0047-9 The compound was prepared by the catalytic hydrogenation of HCI following the .uCuuur udiein L1 he above reference. The product was isolated as a free base as clear oil in 81% yield and the dihydrochloride salt was prepared from 1 M etherial HCI; 1H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 8 1.67 (4H, in), 1.95-3.10 (6H, in), 3.10-3.80 (7H, in), 4.30 (lH, in), 4.65 (lH, in), 7.05 (111, in), 7.35 (3H, in); MIS (FAB) 356 (M ExamDle 3 4 Methanesulfonl.4.I(3,4..hloropheneyl-2-[(l12[(1lidil)thylI piperazine hydrochloride R)-3a HCJ ADL-O-1-0039-6 To the solution of (712 mg, 2inmol in 10 ml CH 2

CI

2 ),miethanesulfonyl chloride (573 mg, 5 inmol) and pyridine (lml) were added at 0 0 C, stirred overnight at that temperature, the -28solution was washed with aq. 5% K 2 CO3 solution, extracted with dichloromethane, dried and evaporated solvent to give crude oil. This material was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel, eluting with dichloromethane-methanol-ammonia (100:5:1), to give the free base, which was dissolved into 2 ml of dichloromethane and HCI (3 ml, 1 M in Et 2 0) was added to afford a white salt -3a HCI (600 mg, mp 130-132 oC; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 8 1.61-1.85 (4H, 2.38-2.65 (6H, 2.72 (3H, s), 2.80-3.06 (2H, 3.15-3.36 (1H, 3.50-3.96 (4H, 4.48-4.93 (1H, 7.00-7.10 (1H, 7.25-7.40 (2H, MS (FAB) 434 (M Anal. Calcd for Ci 8

H

25 C1 2

N

3 0 3 S. HC1.0.5 C, 45.64; H, 5.59; N, 8.63. Found: C, 45.69; H, 5.58; N, 8.73.

Example 4 (R)-4-t-Butyvl-acetyl-l-[(3,4-dichlorophenyl)acetyll-2-[(1-pyrrolidinvl)methylpiperazine [(R)-3bl.

ADL-01-0040-4 S To the solution of (356 mg, Immol in 10 ml acetone), t-butyl bromoacetate (234 mg, 1.2 mmol) and K 2 C0 3 (207 mg, 1.5 mmol) were added at 0 OC, stirred overnight at that temperature, the solution was washed with aq. 5% K 2 CO3 solution, extracted with dichloromethane, dried and evaporated solvent to give crude oil. This material was purified 20 by flash column chromatography on silica gel, eluting with dichloromethane-methanolammonia (100:5:1), to give (R)-3b (329 mg, 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDC13) 8 1.36 (9H, 1.91-2.37 (7H, 2.65-3.13 (7H, 3.58-4.20 (6H, 5.00 (1H, 7.12- 7.21 (2H, 7.40 (1H, The compound was used directly into the following reaction.

Example 4 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyll-3-(1-prrolidinvl)methyll-l-piperazineacetic acid dihydrochloride I(R)-3c 2HC1] ADL-01-0042-0 Compound (R)-3b 329 mg, 0.7 mmol) was dissolved into 5 ml THF/Et 2 0 and HCI ml, 1 M in Et20) was added, kept 12hrs to afford a white salt R)-3c HCI (275 mg, 61%): mp 190 0 C 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCl 3 6 1.85-2.20 (4H, 2.95-4.41 (17H, 5.18-5.35 (1H, 7.30-7.45 (1H, 7.56-7.72 (2H, MS (FAB) 414 (M Anal.

Calcd for C 1 9

H

25

C

2

N

3 0 3 2 HC1.0.5 H 2 C, 45.16; H, 5.78; N, 8.32. Found: C, 44.91; H, Z QQ. XT 0 Example 6 N-t-Boc-D-aspartic acid-B-benzvl ester-l- 3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)acetyll-2-(1pyrrolidinyl)methyll -piperazine [(R)-3dl ADL-01-0048-7 To the solution of N-t-Boc-D-aspartic acid-p-benzyl ester (646mg, 2 mmol) and HOBt 270mg, 2mmol in 10 ml CH 2 C1 2 DCC (413 mg, 2 mmol) was added at 0 OC, stirred Ih at that temperature, (356 mg, 1 mmol in 10 ml CH 2 C1 2 was added, stirred 24 hrs at room temperature, the solution was washed with aq. 5% K 2 C0 3 solution, extracted with dichloromethane, dried and evaporated solvent to give crude oil. This material was purified -29by flash column chromatography on silica gel, eluting with dichioromethane-methanol.

ammonia (100:1:1), to give (R)-3d (628 mg, 1H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCl 3 6 1.35 (9H, 1.70-1.87 (4H, in), 2.32-3.16 (6H, in), 3.35-4.46 (6H1, in), 4.80-5.68 (6H, in), 7.07-7.45 in). The compound was used directly into the reaction below.

Example 7 (R)-4-Aspartic acd 3-ihoohn~ctl 2 Proiiy~eh~ pprzn dihydrochloride F(R)-3e 2HC1 ADL-01-0041-2 +The compound (R)-3d was dissolved into 1 ml of HOAc, and HIi (1 ml, 2N) was added, standing 20 min, then hydrogenated at 1 atm., 10% Pd on carbon at room temperature for 1 h to afford a white salt (R)-3e (430 mg, mp 168 TC 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 6 1.92- 2.16 (411, in), 2.75-5.28 (18H1, in), 2.72 (3H1, 7.31-7.52 (311, in), 8.45-8.80 (3H, in); MIS (FAB) 471 (M Anal. Calcd for C 21

H

28 C1 2

N

4 0 4 2 HCL: C, 46.34; H, 5.18; N, 10.29.

Found: C, 45.52; H, 6.02; N, 9.73.

Example 8 4 -Acetvl-l-[(3,4-dichlorop~henyl)acetl..2-[.I.Pyrrolidiny1~methylI -piperazine hydrochloride I(R)-f HCIl ADL-01-0148-5 The compound was prepared as reported in the literature (J Med Chem. 1993, 36, 2075- 2083) from the hydrochloride salt was prepared from I M etherial HCl to afford (R)-3f HCI in 88% yield; mp 153-155 0 C; MIS (FAB) 398 (M Anal. Calcd for C1 9

H

25 Cl 2

N

3 0 2 .HCl.H 2 0: C, 52.49; H, 6.03; N, 9.66. Found: C, 50.40; H, 6.23; N, 9.28.

Example 9 (R)-4-(Diethoxyphosphonate).- I(3,4-dichlorophenyl)acetvll2.(1 -pvrrolidinyl)methylj- Piperazine hydrochloride R)-3g HCJ ADL-01-0149-3 To v a souto ofu- 176,5 mmoi) I 10 IL 0f %CH 2 t-, 2 was added Et 3 N (0.101U g, inmol) and diethylchlorophosphonate (0.174 g, 1.0 mmol) under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 13 h and then poured over aqueous

K

2 C0 3 The organic layer was separated, dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure to give the compound as a yellow oil. The oil was purified on a silica gel column (solvent system: CH 2 Cl 2

:CH

3 OH:28% NH 4 OH, 95:5:2) and converted to hydrochloride salt by usual method to give (R)-3g HCl, 0.10 g mp 168-170 0 C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 5 1.20 (611, t, J 7.0 Hz), 1.64 (411, in), 2.30-2.70 (611, in), 2.85-3.15 (111, in), 3.45-3.80 (4H1, mn), 3.60 (2H, brs), 3.98 (411, in), 4.35 (111, in), 4.70 (111, in), 7.00 (111, in), 7.30 (211, in); MIS (FAB) 492, 494 (M Anal. Caled for C21H 32

C

2

N

3 0 4 P.HCl.0.5H 2 0: C, 46.90; H, 6.37; N, 7.81. Found: C, 46.66; H, 5.90; N, 8.16.

Example (R)-4-Trifluoroacetvl-l-f(3,4-dichlorophenyl)acetyl2.-(1i-pyrrolidinyl)methyll piperazine hydrochloride I(R)-3h HCIJ ADL-01-0150-1 To a solution of (0.356 g, 1.0 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 C1 2 was added Et 3 N (0.202 g, mmol) and trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.42 g, 2.0 mmol) in a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12h and TLC showed staring material was still present, added another equivalent of trifluoroacetic anhydride and stirring was continued for additional 12 h. The reaction was worked up as above and the hydrochloride salt was prepared as usual to give (R)-3h HCI, 0.25 g mp 145-147 0 C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDC1 3 5 1.60 (4H, 2.20-2.75 (6H, 3.10 (1H, 3.45-3.80 (4H, m), 4.00 (1H, J 14.0 Hz, 4.25 (1H, 4.45 (1H, J 14.0 Hz, 4.70 (1H, 7.00 (1H, 7.28 (2H, MS (FAB) 452, 454 (M H) Anal. Calcd for 15 C9H 22 C1 2

F

3

N

3 0 2 .HC.0.5H 2 0: C, 45.85; H, 4.86; N, 8.44. Found: C, 46.26; H, 4.82; N, 8.33.

y. Example 11

R)-

4 3 ,4-Dichlorophenyl)acetyl-3- [(-pyrrolidinl)methyll -1-piperazinecarboxamide hydrochloride I(R)-3i HCll 20 ADL-01-0151-9 S To a solution of (0.356 g, 1.0 mmol) in acetic acid (0.186 g, 3.0 mmol) and water was added KOCN (0.244 g, 3.0 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 h. An aqueous 10% K 2 C0 3 was added to the reaction mixture to bring the pH to near 12.0 and the product was extracted with CH 2 C12, washed with saturated salt solution, dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 The removal of solvent at reduced oressure gave the crude product which was purified on a silica gel column (solvent system: CH 2

CI

2 :CH30H:28% NH 4 0H, 95:5:1) to give the desired product as a white solid. The hydrochloride salt was prepared from 1M etheial HCI to give (R)-3i HCI as a white solid, 0.15 g 1H NMR (free base, 200 30 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.65 (4H, 2.10-3.20 (6H, 3.40-3.70 (4H, 3.95 (2H, 4.20 (2H, J 14.0 Hz, 4.70 (1H, 5.35 (2H, bs), 7.00 (1H, 7.25 (2H, MS (FAB) 399, 401 (M H) Anal. Calcd for C18H 24 C1 2

N

4 0 2 .HC1.H 2 0.0.125 CH 2 C2: C, 46.88; H, 5.91; N, 12.06. Found: C, 46.66; H, 5.50; N, 11.97.

Example 12 (R)-4-[(3,4-Dichlorophenyl)acetyll-3-[(l-pyrrolidinvl)methyl -1piperazinecarboxaldehyde hydrochloride HCll ADL-01-0156-8 To a solution of (0.356 g, 1.0 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 C1 2 was added 1.0 mL of methylformate (excess) at 0°C under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 h and solvent was removed at reduced pressure to give the crude product. The compound was purified on a silica gel column (solvent system: CH 2 C1 2

:CH

3 0H:28%

NH

4 0H, 95:5:1) and converted to the hydrochloride salt, (R)-3j HCI, 0.10 g mp 126 0 C 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 5 1.62 (4H, 2.10-3.20 (6H, 3.35- -31- 3.85 (5H, 4.25 (3H, 4.60 (1H, 7.00 (1H, 7.26 (2H, 7.90 (1H, MS (FAB) 384, 386 (M H) Example 13 4 -l(3,4-Dichlorophenyl)acetyll- 3 -[(l-pvrrolidinyl)methyll -1-Diperazine-sulfonamide hydrochloride HCI ADL-1-0164-2 To a solution of (0.356 g, 1.0 mmol) in 5 mL of p-dixane was added sulfamide 4

(NH

2

SO

2

NH

2 0.96 g, 10 mmol) under a nitrogen atmosphere and the reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure and the residue was redissolved in CH 2 C12 and washed with aqueous 10% K 2

CO

3 saturated salt solution, and dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 The removal of solvent resulted the 15 free base of the product which was purified on a silica gel column (solvent system: S CH 2 C1 2

:CH

3 0H:28% NH 4 0H, 98:2:1) The hydrochloride salt was prepared from 1M S. etherial HCI to give (R)-3k HCI, 0.10 g mp 183-185C; 1H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDC1 3 8 1.68 (4H, 2.30-3.00 (6H, 3.15-4.00 (5H, 4.15-4.65 (3H, 4.85 (1H, 7.00 (1H, 7.31 (4H, MS (FAB) 435 (M H) Anal. Calcd for 20 C17H 2 4 C1 2

N

4 0 3 S.HCl: C, 43.28; H, 5.34; N, 11.87. Found: C, 42.90; H, 5.35; N, 11.43.

Ref.

Alker, D. et. al. J. Med. Chem. 1990, 33, 585.

Example 14 (R)-4-(4-Methyphenvlsulfonyl)-l-[( 3 4 -dichlorophenyl)acetyll-2-l(1-pyrrolidinyl)methyll -piperazine hydrochloride I(R)-31 HCII ADL-01-0165-9 3 To a solution of (0.356 g, 1.0 mmol) in 5 mL of CH 2 C12 was added p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (0.38 g, 2 mmol) followed by 0.5 mL of pyridine under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then poured onto aqueous

K

2 C0 3 The organic layer was separated and dried over anhydrous Na 2 S4 The removal of solvent gave the product which was purified on a silica gel column (solvent system:

CH

2 C1 2

:CH

3 0H:28% NH40H, 98:2:1). The hydrochloride salt was prepared to give (R)-31 HCI, 0.15 g mp 240°C 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCl 3 6 1.65 (41, im), 1.95-3.00 (6H, 2.38 (3H, 3.15-3.85 (5H. 4.45 (1H, 4.75 (1H, 6.95 (1H, m), 7.25 (4H, 7.50 (2H, J 8.0 Hz, MS (FAB) 510 (M H) Anal. Calcd for C2 4

H

29 C1 2

N

3 0 3 S.HC1.0.25H 2 0: C, 52.32; H, 5.35; N, 7.63. Found: C, 52.23; H, 5.50; N, 7.51.

Racemic Compounds Racemic compounds were prepared as illustrated by the following steps.

-32-

R

HRI

rD RX/base KN N CDI

N

N"N N"J- C ArCH 2

CO

2 H N H

H

R SO 2

CH

3 A R CO 2

CH

3 A R COCH 3 R SO 2

CH

3 R CO 2

CH

3 (R,S)-1O R COCH 3 2 -I(l-P-Yrrolidinyl)methyllniperazine hydrochloride

HCIJ

The compound was prepared following the literature procedure, and isolated as hydrochloride salt.

S0 2 C1 3

CO

2

CH

3

COCH

3 -Pvrrolidinyl)methyllpiperazine hydrochloride 6, 71 These compounds were also prepared according to the procedures described in the literature 1 I and each of the products were purified as free base before utilizing below.

Example 4 -Methanesulfonyl-1...(3,4-dichlorophenyl)acetl 2 -['1-nyrrolidinvl)methylI Diljerazine hydrochloride (R,S)-8a HCJ (General Procedure) ADL-0J-0-135-2 1,1 '-Carbonyldiimidazole (0.324 g, 2.0 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 3,4dichiorophenylacetic acid (0.41 g, 2. 0 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 C1 2 at room temperature under a nitrogen atmosphere, and the resulting solution was continued stiffing for additional 1 hi.

The resulting solution was then added to a stirred solution of (RS)-5 (0.247 g, 1.0 mmol) in mL of CH 2 Cl 2 at 0 0 C and the reaction mixture was stirred for further 20 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH 2

CI

2 and washed with aqueous 2M Na 2

CO

3 The organic layer was dried and evaporated to dryness and the product was purified on a silica gel column (solvent system: CH 2 Cl 2

:CH

3 0H:28% NH, 4 OH. 98:2:1)- The, hydrohlride- salt was rceared by redissolving the compound in CH 2 Cl 2 and treating the solution with IM etherial HCl to give (RS)-8a HCI as a white solid, 0.20 g NMR (see R-3a); MS (FAB) 434 (M H+ Anal. Calcd for C 18

H

25 C1 2

N

3 0 3 S. HCI.0.5H 2 0: C, 45.13; H, 5.51; N, 8.77. Found: C, 45.46; H, 5.3 6; N, 8.7 1.

The following compounds were similarly prepared from 6,and 7: Example 16

(RS)

4 MethanesulfonvF.14[(4methlsulfonylhenl)acel2(pvrroldnl)methylipiperazine hydrochloride f(R,S)-8b HCIJ ADL-01-011 The compound was prepared from 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid and the hydrochloride salt was recrystallized from CH 3 0H to give (RS)-8b HCI in 60% yield; mp 185-188'C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.65 (4H, in), 2.30-2.70 (6H, in), 2.80 (3H, 2.85- 3.10 (3H, in), 3.00 (2H, in), 3.25 in), 3.50-3.95 (4H, in), 4.50 (1H, in), 4.80 (IH, in)), 7.40 (2H, J 7.5 Hz, 7.80 (2H, J 7.5 Hz, MS (FAB) 444 (M Anal. Caled for C1 9

H

29

N

3 0 5

S

2 HCI: C, 47.54; H, 6.30; N, 8.75. Found: C, 46.03; H, 6.24; N, 8.80.

15 Example 17 1000hydrochloride R.S-8c

HCIJ

ADL-01-0119-6 The compound was prepared from 2 -nitrophenylacetic acid in 65% yield as hydrochloride salt; mp 253-255'C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.70 (4H, in), 2.40-3.10 (6H, in), 2.75 (3H, 3.45 (1H, in), 3.70-4.00 (4H, in), 4.05-4.30 (2H, in), 4.50 (1H, in), 4.72 (1H, in), 7.45 (3H, in), 8.05 (1H, J 8.0 Hz, MIS (FAB) 411 (M Anal. Calcd for CisH 26

N

4

O

5 S.HC1: C, 48.37; H, 6.09; N, 12.54. Found: C, 48.36; H, 5.66; N, 12.29.

*gave:Example 18 a (R9S) 4 Methanesulfonvl[4tri[(4trioetvmpenlpceyl-2ce(lJvrrlidil)- 9 methyll piperazine hydrochloride [R,S)-8d HCJ ADL-01-0120-4 The compound was prepared as a hydrochloride salt from 4 -trifluoroinetylphenylacetic acid in 82% yield; 182-185 0 C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCJ 3 8 1.65 (4H, in), 2.35-3.05 (6H, in), 2.71 (3H, 3.25 (IH, in), 3.50-3.95 (5H, in), 4.55 (1H, in), 4.85 (1H, in), 7.30 (2H, in), 7.50 (2H, J 7.8 Hz, MS (FAB) 434 (M Anal. Calcd for C19H 26

F

3

N

3 3 S.HCl05H 2 0: C, 47.65; H, 5.89; N, 8.77. Found: C, 48.36; H, 5.80; N, 8.51.

Example 19 ehnslonlIF3idllctyl2[lproiiyl-ehlpprzn hydrochloride (R,S)-8e HC1 ADL-01-0134-5 The compound was prepared from 3-indoleacetic acid and isolated as free base in 40% yield and converted to hydrochloride salt; mp 219-22 1 C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 8 1.65 (4H, in), 2.10-3.00 (6H, in), 2.55 (3H, 3.10-3.45 (2H, in), 3.45-3.90 (4H, in), 4.05 (1H, in), 4.55 (1H, in), 4.90 (1H, in), 7.05 (3H, in), 7.25 (IH, in), 7.50 (1H, in), 8.95 (1H, bs); -34-

I

MS (FAB) 405 (M Anal. Caled for C2 0

H

28

N

4 0 3 S.HC1.0.5H20: C, 58.09; H, 7.07; N, 13.55. Found: C, 58.37; H, 6.68; N, 13.30.

Example (RAS-Methyl 4 -k 4 -methvlsUlfOnYlhenlacetl 3 -T(1-pyvrrolidinyl)-metyl.1 nipyerazinecarboxylate hydrochloride [kR,S)-9a HCIJ ADL-01-0092-5 The compound was prepared from 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid and the hydrochloride was prepared from I M etherial HCl to give (RS)-9a HCI in 46 yield; mp 225'C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCl 3 6 1.60 (4H, in), 2.15-2.95 (6H, mn), 2,98 (31H, 3.15 (2H, in), 3.35 (3H, in), 3.60 (3H, 3.95 (2H, in), 4.30 (111, mn), 4.72 (1H, in), 7.45 (2H, mn), 7.75 (2H, J 7.5 Hz, MS (FAB) 424 (M Anal. Calcd for C2oHwqN 3

O

5 S.HCI.0.25vJ 2 0: C, 15 51.72; H, 6.62; N, 9.05. Found: C, 51.93; H, 6.47; N, 8.44.

Example 21 :(R,S)-Methyl 4- I( 4 -trifluoromethlphenl)acetvll3d[(1.prrolidinyl)methylll1 Piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride [(RS)-9b HCIJ ADL-01-0094-1 *se: The compound was prepared as a hydrochloride salt from 4 -trifluorometylphenylacetic acid to *OSS* give (RS)-9b HCI in 48%; mp 210'C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC1 3 8 1.50 (4H1, in), 1.95- 2.30 (6H1, in), 2.35-3.50 (4H, in), 3.65 (3H, 3.70-4.50 (5H1, in), 7.45 (4H, in); MS (FAB) 414 (M Anal. Calcd for C20H 26

F

3 N0 3 .HCI.0.25H 2 0: C, 52.86; H, 6.10; N, 9.25.

Found: C, 53.03; H, 5.94; N, 8.94.

COe

CH

2 Ph *e S*

I

N N 0 (RS)-11

CF

3 Another minor product (RS)-1 1 (ADL-01-0093-3) was isolated as a hydrochloride salt from this reaction in 10% yield; mp 1 90 0 C; MS (FAB) 446 (M

I

Example 22 (RS)-Methyl 4- I(3-indolvl)acetvll-3- [(l-nvrrolidinyl)-methyll-l-piperazine-carboxvlate hydrochloride HCiI ADL-01-0095-8 The compound was prepared from 3-indoleacetic acid and the hydrochloride salt was prepared to give (RS)-9c HCl in 75% yield; mp 143 0 C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 6 1.55 (4H, in), 1.90-2.52 (6H, mn), 2.70-3.75 (9H, in), 3.35 (3H, 6.60 (2H, mn), 6.85 (2H, mn), 7.20 (1H, 7.65 (1H, brs); MS (FAB) 385 (M Example 23 (R,S)-Methyl 4 2 -nitrophenl)acetyl1-3-I(l-pvrrolidinyl)rnethyl1..1piperazine- AL0-066carboxylate hydrochloride fkR,S)-9d HCIJ The compound was prepared from 2-nitrophenyacetic acid and hydrochloride was prepared 20 from IM etherial HC1 to give (RS)-9d HCl in 42% yield; mp 228 0 C; 'H NMR (free base, 20200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.60 (4H, brs), 1.80-2.30 (4H, in), 2.70 (2H, in), 3.05 (2H, mn), 3.60 (3H, 3.55-4.10 (4H, mn), 4.35 (2H, J 14.0 Hz, dd), 5.10 (1H, in), 7.50 (3H, in), 8.05 (1H, J Hz, MIS (FAB) 391 (M Anal. Calcd for Cl 9

H

26

N

4 0 5 .HCI: C, 53.46; H, 6.37; N, 13.12. Found: C, 54.29; H, 6.38; N, 12.58.

Example 24 (R,S)-Methyl 4 40(-methoxyPhenlacetvl-3-(1-pyrrolidiny methy1 -1-piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride f(RS)-9e HCIJ ADL-01-0097-4 .301 The compound was prepared as above from 2 -methoxyphenylacetic acid to give (RS)-9e HCI in 12% yield; mp 120'C; 1H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.65 (4H, in), 2.25 -2.95 (6H, in), 3.10 (1H, in), 3.30-4.10 (51H, in), 3.60 (3H, 3.70 (3H, 4.40 (1H, in), 4.70 (1H, in), 6.84 (2H, in), 7.15 (3H, in); MS (FAB) 376 (M Anal. Calcd for

C

2 oH 29

N

3

O

4 .HCl.H 2 0: C, 55.87; H, 7.50; N, 9.77. Found: C, 55.78; H, 6.97; N, 9.42.

Example (R,S)-Methyl 4 2 -aminophenvl)acet-yl-3-[I-Pyrrolidinyl)-methyl1..1piperazinecarboxylate dihydrochloride (R,S)-9f 211C11 ADL-0J-0098-2 The compound was prepared by the hydrogenation of (RS)-9e HCl on 10% Pd/C following the procedure described in the literature 1. The compound, (RS)-9f 2HCI, was isolated as dihydrochloride in 84% yield; mp 195'C 'H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d 6 6 2.00 (4H, in), 3.05-4.45 (16H, in), 3.75 (3H, 5.00 (1H, in), 7.45 (4H, brs); MIS (FAB) 361 (M H+ Anal. Calcd for CjqH 28

N

4 0 3 .2HCI.H 2 0: C, 50.56; H, 7.15; N, 12.41. Found: C, 50.36; H, 7.26; N, 12.05.

-36- Example 26 (RS--ctll[4mtysloypevlaeyl3[IProiiy)mtvl Piperazine hydrochloride r(R,S)-10a HCIJ ADL-OJ-0-144-4 The compound was prepared as above from 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid and the hydrochloride salt was prepared in usual fashion to give (RS)-l0a HCl in 45% yield; mp 145-147'C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d 6 6 1.90 (4H, in), 2.17 (3H, 2.65-3.80 (6H, in).

3.32 (3H, 3.85-4.45 (8H, in), 5.05 (1H, in), 7.65 (2H, J =8.0 Hz, 7.95 (2H, J 8.0 Hz, MS (FAB) 408 (M Example 27

(RS)-

4 -Acetvl-l-(4-trifluoromethvlphenyl)acet-l1 -3-k(l-pvrrolidinyl)-methylI 15 Piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride f(R,S)-10b HCII ADL-01-0145-1 The compound was prepared from 4 -trifluorometylphenylacetic acid and isolated as *hydrochloride salt, (RS)-l0b HCI, in 30% yield; mp 1 I10 0 C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d,) .20 8 2.00 (4H, in), 2.15 (3H, 2.70-3.25 (6H, in), 3.50-4.45 (8H, in), 5.05 (1H, in), 7.70 (4H, in); MIS (FAB) 398 (M Example 28 (RS--ctv--(-rfurmtvpenlae~l--(-yrldnl-ehl piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride f(R,S)-10c HCI1 ADL-01-0157-6 30 The compound was prepared from 2 -trifluorometylphenylacetic acid and the hydrochloride salt was made from I M etherial HCl to give (RS)-l0c HCI in 57%; 220 0 C 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 8 1.65 (4H, in), 2.05 (3H, 2.25-3.25 (6H, in), 3.40-4.10 (6H, in), 4.50 (2H, in), 4.70 (1IH, in), 7.30 (2H, in), 7.60 (2H, in); MIS (FAB) 398 (M Example 29 (R,S-4-Acetyl-l-[k3-nitrophenyl)acetl1-3[(l-prrolidinyl)-methyll piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride (R,S)-10d HCJ ADL-01-0158-4 The compound was prepared from 3-nitrophenylacetic acid and the hydrochloride salt, (RS)- 10d HCl was isolated as a white solid in 69% yield; mp 143-145'C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.63 (4H, brs), 2.05 (3H, 2.20-2.80 (6H, in), 2.90-3.25 (2H, in), 3.50-3.90 (3H, in), 4.00 (lH, J 14.0 Hz, 4.45 (2H, in), 4.65 (lH, in), 7.45 (2H, in), 8.00 (2H, mn); MS (FAB) 375 (M Anal. Calcd for C 1 9

H

26

N

4 0 4 .HC1.H 2 0: C, 53.2 1; H, 6.8 1; N, 13.06.

Found: C, 5 3.5 1; H, 6.13; N, 12.9 1.

Example (R,S)-4-Acetvl-l-I(2-nitrophenyl)actyl..3-[ (l-pyrrolidinyl)-methylj piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride I(J?,S)-10e HCiJ ADL-01-0163-4 The compound was prepared as above from 2 -nitrophenylacetic acid to give (RS)-l0e HCI as white solid in 50% yield; mp 1 80'C 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 8 1.63 (4H, in), 2.04 (3H, 2.20-2.85 (6H, in), 2.98-3.35 (3H, mn), 3.60-4.25 mn), 4.60 (2H, in), 7.35 (3H, in), 8.00 (lH, J 7.0 Hz, MS (FAB) 375 (M Anal. Calcd for

CI

9

H

26

N

4 0 4 .HCI.0.5H 2 0: C, 55.54; H, 6.62; N, 13.64. Found: C, 54.38; H, 6.35; N, 13.58.

Example 31 (RS--ctll 1-irpevlae-l--(1 pyvrrolidinyl) methyvll piperazinecarboxylate hydrochloride I(RAS-10f HCIl ADL-01-0159-2 The compound was prepared from 2 -nitrophenylacetic acid as before to give (RS)-l0f HCI in 52% yield; 146-148'C; 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.68 (4H, in), 2.07 (3H, s), 2.20-2.75 (6H, in), 3.40-3.90 (3H, in), 4.05 (lH, J =13.5 Hz, 4.50 (2H, in), 7.35 (2H, J *20 8.0 Hz, 8.10 (2H, J 8.0 Hz, MS (FAB) 375 (M Anal. Caled for C19H26N 4 0 4 .HC.0.5H 2 0-0125CH 2

C

2 C, 53.36; 6.61; 13.01. Found: C, 53.16; H, 6.27; N, 13.36.

Example 32 (R9S)- 4 -(Phenlmethvl)..1.[(4,5,.dichloro.2nitrophenyl)acevl- 2 pyrrolidinyl)methyllpiperazine dihYdrochloride (R,S)-12 21101 ADL-01-0166-7 The compound was prepared from 4 -phenylmethyl-2 [(Il-pyrrolidinyl)inethyl]piperazine (Ref.

1) and 4 ,5-dichloro-2-nitrophenylacetic acid following the method described above to give (RS)-12 2HCl in 63% yield; mp 235'C 'H NMR (free base, 200 MHz, CDCI 3 8 1.66 in), 2.05-3.00 (8H, in), 3.45 (4H, in), 4.00 (5H, in), 4.60 (lH, in), 7.35 (6H, in), 8.15 (lH, MS (FAB) 493 (M Anal. Caled for C2 4

H

29 C1 2

N

4 0 3 .2HCI: C, 50.99; 5.53; 9.91. Found: C, 50.55; H, 5.16; N, 9.44.

Compounds of formula 1I General procedure for DCC/pyr coupling. With stirring at 25'C under N 2

DCC

(2.06 eq) and CH 2 Cl 2 were added to a mixture of the acid (2 eq) and pyridine (2.06 eq) in

CH

2 Cl 2 After 1-2 min, a solution of the amine (1 eq) in CH 2 C1 2 was added, and the mixture was stirred at 25'C under N 2 overnight. The final concentration of the mixture is around 0.1 0.3 mM with respect to the amine. Sat'd. NaHCO 3 (2 inL) was added to destroy excess active esters before the mixture was filtered through celite, and the DCU was washed with

CH

2

CI

2 The filtrate was then partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2

CI

2 which was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. Toluene was added to azeotrope off pyridine before the crude product was chromatographed and converted to the HCl salt.

Compounds having the following structures were prepared: Me,

NH

X~N X YNMe X=-OMe R :R X=-N0 2 ADL-0 1-00 17-2, X=-OMe, R, R 2 =3,4-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-01-0018-0, X=-OH, Re-H, R 2 =3,4-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-01-0019-8,

X-OCH

2

CO

2 H, Rl=-H, R 2 =3,4-C 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0020-6, X=-OMe, R 1

=R

2 =phenyl ADL-0 1-0021-4, X=-OH, Rg=R 2 =phenyl ADL-01-0029-7, X=-N0 2

R

1

R

2 =2-N 2 -4,5-C 2 -phenyl ADL-01-003 1-3, X=-N0 2 Rl=-H, R 2 =3,4-C 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0032-1, X=-N11 2

R

1

R

2 =3 ,4-C1-phenyl 1, ADL-O 1-0034-7, X=-N0 2

R

1

R

2 =4-methylsulfonylphenyl ADL-01-0037-0,

X=-N(CH

2

CO

2 tBU) 2 Rl=-FI, R 2 =3,4-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0044-6, X=-N(Cq 2

CO

2

H)

2

R

1

R

2 =3 ,4-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0052-9, X=-N(CH 2

CO

2 Et) 2 Rl=-H, R 2 =3 ,4-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0053-7, X=-NHPO 3 Et 2

R

1

R

2 =3 ,4-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-01-0070-1, X= -NH(CI-I) 2

PO

3 Et 2 Rl=-H, R 2 =3,4-C 2 -phenyl Intermediates and were prepared via reported methods from the appropriate starting materials. 5 Compounds and are known compounds prepared via reported methods. 5 Compounds through were prepared by DCC coupling of either or W+-2 to an arvincetic acidl followedl by demethylation or reductLion tO allow peripheralization.

Ref.

Rajagopalan, P. et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Letters 1992, 2, 72 1-726.

-39- 0n.0. NHCH3 Similar chemistry. 0 N R=-OMe R=-H ADL-0l-0090-9, R=-OMe ADL-01-0099-0,

R=-H

Intermediates 17 and 18 were prepared via known methods from 6-methoxy-1I-tetralone and 1 -tetralone, respectively. Intermediates 17 and 18 were coupled to 3,4-dichiorophenylacetic acid to produce and

HN-OH

3 3 CI3 W NDj

ND

ADL-0 1 -005 1-1

H-

3 C, N H

H-

3 C, N 0 R ADL-0 1-0104-8, R 1

R

2 =2-N0 2 -4,5-C1 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0105-5, R 1

R

2 =3-N0 2 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0106-3, R 1

R

2 =2-N0 2 -4-CF 3 -phenyl ADL-0 1-0107-1, R 1

R

2 =3 ,4-C1 9 -phenyl ADL-0 1 -01 09-9 R. =-phenylR 2 Phe ADL-0 1-0109-7, R, R 2 =4-methylsulfonylphenyl Intermediates and were prepared via similar chemistry from 1 -benzosuberone, and (±)-trans-2-bromo-1I-indanol.1I Compounds (Niravoline), 6 and are known compounds prepared via reported chemistry. 1 Compounds through were prepared by DCC coupling to the appropriate arylacetic acid.

Ref.

Bellissant, E. et al. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 1996, 278, 232-242.

Representative examples follow.

Example 33 2-f 7- [U)-trans-1 -(N-3,4-dichlorophenylacetamido-N-methylamino)-2-(1-pyrrolidinyl)- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthoxyl I acetic acid ADL-O1-OO 19-8) With stirring at 25 TC under N 2 t-butyl bromoacetate (0.35 mL, 2.38 mmol) was added to a mixture of (0.688 g, 1.59 mmol) and K 2 C0 3 (0.5 g, 3.6 mmol) in DMF (8 mL), and the mixture was stirred at 25 TC under N 2 overnight before the mixture was evaporated under high vacuum. The residue was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and C11 2 C1 2 (2 X 100 mL), which was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The t-butyl ester intermediate was flash column chromatographed twice eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 :2% MeOH and CH 2

CI

2

NH

3 :1I% MeOFI, respectively. The t-butyl ester was then deprotected in a mixture of THF (4 mL) and conc. H-CI (2 mL) with stirring at 25 0 C overnight and at TC for lh before the mixture was evaporated. The residue was then dissolved in a mixture of trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL), 4 N HCl (2 mL), and anisole (1 drop), and stirred at 25 TC for days before the mixture was evaporated. The oily residue was triturated with Et 2 O and sonicated to yield (0.259 g, 3 1 m.p. (HIi salt) 13 8 TC (dec); 'H NMR (FICI salt, ::DMSO-d 6 8 1.7-2.1 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2-4.8 (complex, 13H, 6 -CH 2 and 1 2.79 3H, -NCHA) 5.98 J =10.3 Hz, 1H, 6.40 iIH, aromatic), 6.82 (in, iIH, aromatic), 7.12 J 8.2 Hz, IlH, aromatic), 7.3 9 J 8.3 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 7.63 (in, 2H, 000 0 aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 491. Anal. H, N) C 25

H

28

N

2 0 4 C1 2 HCl.

Example 34 2 2 -Divhenvl-N-methyl-N-I(±)-trans-2-(1..pyrrolidiny).7m thox-1,2,3 4-.

tetrahydronaphth-1-ylilacetamide ADL-01-0020-6) ADL-0 1 -0020-6 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling method from (1.453 g, 5.58 mmol), diphenylacetic acid (2.369 g, 11.16 mmol), DCC (2.373 g, 11.50 mmol), and pyridine (0.93 mL, 11.5 inmol). The product was flash column chromatographed eluting with

CH

2 Cl 2 NH1 3 1% MeOH before it was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2

O

and crystallized from MeOH-Et 2 O to yield (1.7 g, m.p. (HCI salt) >250 0

C;

'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.8-2.0 (br s, 4H4, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2-3.9 (complex, 9H1, 4-

CH

2 and 1 2.79 3H1, -NCH 3 3.48 3H, -OCHA) 5.66 I1H, 6.1 J 9.4 Hz, iIH, 6.23 I1H, aromatic), 6.77 (d of d, J 2.4 Hz and 8.4 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 7.09 J =8.5 Hz, iIH, aromatic), 7.2-7.5 (complex, lOH, aromatic). MS (FAB) in/z 455.

Anal. H, N) C 3 oH 34

N

2 0 2

HCI.

Example 2,2-Diphenyl-N-methvl-N- 1 L)-trans-2-(1-pvrrolidinyl)-7-hydroxY-1 tetrahydronaphth-l-yllacetamide ADL-O1-0021-4) With stirring in dry ice-acetone under N 2 1.0 M BBr 3 in CH- 2 C1 2 (19.7 mL) was added at a fast drop rate to a solution of (1.491 g, 3.28 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (20 mL), and the mixture was allowed to slowly warm to 25 0 C under N 2 as the dry ice sublimed. After 6.5 h, the mixture was quenched with MeGH with ice-H 2 0 cooling and diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL).

The mixture was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 Cl 2 Some yellowish precipitate -41was extracted into CH1 2

CI

2 by adding some MeGH. The organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was flash column chromatographed eluting with CHCl 3

NH

3 MeGH to yield (0.426 g, Part of the free base was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HC1 in Et 2 O: 'H NMR (free base, CDCI 3 8 1.5-1.8 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 1.8-2.9 (complex, 9H, 4 -CH 2 and 1 2.55 3H-, -NCHA) 5.21 (s, 11-, 5.83 J 8.6 Hz, 1H, 6.22 IIH, aromatic), 6.46 (in, 1H, aromatic), 6.78 J =8.1 Hz, 1IH, aromatic), 7-7.4 (complex, 1 OH, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 441.

Anal. H, N) C2TI 32

N

2 2

HCIH

2 0.

Example 36 2 2 -Nitro-4,5-dichlorophenyl)Nmethyl-N-[(J)-trans-2-(l-nvrrolidinyl)-7-nitro.1 ,2,3,4tetrahydronaphth-17Vllacetamide ADL-01-0029-7) ADL-01-0029-7 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling method from (0.5790 g, 2.103 mmol), 2 -nitro-4,5-dichlorophenylacetic acid (1.0512 g, 4.204 mmol), DCC (0.8948 g, 4.34 mmol), and pyr (0.35 mL, 4.3 mmol). After stirring at 25 TC overnight, more 2-nitro- 4 ,5-dichlorophenylacetic acid (1.0510 g, 4.203 mmol), DCC (0.8946 g, 4.34 mmol), and

CH

2 Cl 2 (10 mL) were added, and after 5 h, the reaction was worked up according to the 20 general procedure. The crude product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 :2%

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and washed with hot MeOH to yield (0.4948 g, 43% yield): m.p. (HCl salt) >250 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 61 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2-4.6 (complex, 1 I1H, 5 -CH 2 and 1 2.9 (s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.1 J 10.2 Hz, lH, 7.53 J 8.5 Hz, lH, aromatic), 7.89 lH, aromatic), 7.91 I1H, aromatic), 8.12 (d of d, J 2.2 Hz and 8.5 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 8.4 (s, 11H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 507. Anal. H, N) C 23

H

24

N

4 0 5 C1 2 HCl.

Example 37 tetrahvydronaphth-l-vllacetamide ADL-O1-0031-3) ADL-0 1-0031-3 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (1.8173 g, 6.600 mmol), 3 4 -dichlorophenylacetic acid (2.7066 g, 13.20 mmol), DCC (2.8057 g, 13.60 mmol), and pyr 10 mL, 13.6 mmol). The product was purified by flash column eluting with CH- 2 C1 2

NH-

3 :1I% MeOH before it was converted to the HCl salt with Et 2

O-

HCI and washed with hot MeOH to yield (2.49 g, m.p. (HCl salt) 255-257 0 'u NJhAfD (flf-i u~1 rhxic'r, -j n AV Iqlxx- j~.i i I dL, LJ/'vJOkJ-u6) 01~- kor S, 4H-, -UH- 2

UH

2 2-4.2 (complex, 1 1H, 5 CH4 2 and 1 2.83 3H, -NCH 3 6.1 J 9.8 Hz, I1H, 7.3-7.7 (complex, aromatic), 8.06 (d of d, J 2.4 Hz and 8.6 Hz, 1H, aromatic). MIS (FAB) m/z 462. Anal. (C, H, N) C 23

H

25

N

3 0 3 C1 2

HCI.

Example 38 2 3 ,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methvl-N-(±)-trans-2-(-pyrrolidinyl)7.amino.1 ,2,3 4-.

tetrahvdronaphth-1-lacetamide ADL-01 -0032-1) With stirring at 55 TC, Raney nickel (50% slurry in H 2 0) was added in small portions to a mixture of 10 g, 4.54 mmol) and hydrazine hydrate (4 mL) in EtOH (60 mL) until all hydrazine was decomposed in 30 min. The mixture was filtered through celite, and the Raney nickel was washed with hot MeOH (120 mL). The filtrate was evaporated and dried in vacuo before the residue was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2

CI

2 which was dried (Na 2 S0 4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was purified by gravity column eluting with CHC1 3

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HC1 salt with Et 2

O-

HCI to yield HCI (0.3 g, 14%, unoptimized): m.p. (HCl salt) >250 'H NMR (free base, CDC13) 6 1.64 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 1.9-3.8 (complex, 11H, 5 -CH 2 and 1 2.59 3H, -NCH 3 5.8 J =9.7 Hz, 1H, 6.29 1H, aromatic), 6.43 J 8 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 6.8 J 8 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 7.17 J 8 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 7.3 2H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 432. Anal. H, N) C 23

H

27

N

3 0C1 2 2HCl.

Example 39 2 4 -Methvlsulfonvlphenyvl)-N-methvl-N-[(±)-trans-2-(l-pyrrolidinyvl)-7-nitro-1,2,3,4tetrahydronaphth-l-yllacetamide ADL-01-0034-7) 15 ADL-01-0034-7 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.3414 g, 1.240 mmol), 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid (0.5309 g, 2.478 mmol), DCC (0.5288 g, 2.563 mmol), and pyr (0.21 mL, 2.55 mmol). After stirring at 25 °C overnight, more of 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid (0.5307 g, 2.477 mmol), DCC (1.1356 g, 5.504 mmol), and CH 2 C1 2 (13 mL) were added, and the mixture was worked up according to the general procedure after another night of stirring. The product was purified by gravity column eluting with CHC 3

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with Et 2 0- HC1 and washed with hot MeOH to yield (+)-11HCI (0.4455 g, m.p. (HC1 salt) 284- 285 1H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 5 1.96 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.1-4.3 (complex, 11H, 5 -CH 2 and 1 2.88 3H, -NCH 3 3.24 3H, -SO 2

CH

3 6.13 J 10 Hz, 1H, 7.51 J =8.8 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 7.68 3H, aromatic), 7.9 J 8.7 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 8.08 (d of d, J 2.6 Hz and 8.5 Hz, 1H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 472. Anal. (C, H, N) C24H 29

N

3 0 5 SHCI0.25CH 2

C

2 Example 2 3 4 -Dichlorophenvl)-N-methvl-N- I±1-trans-2-1 -pvrrolidinyll-7-[N.N-bis-(tbutoxycarbonylmethyl)-aminol-1.

2 .3.

4 -tetrahdronaphth-l-vlacetamide ADL-01-0037-0) With stirring in ice-H 2 0 under N 2 t-butyl bromoacetate (0.34 mL, 2.32 mmol) was added dropwise to a mixture of (0.4014 g, 0.928 mmol) and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.81 mL, 4.64 mmol) Sdry TF mL). After 10 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 "C under N 2 overnight before more t-butyl bromoacetate (0.30 mL) was added at 25 After stirring overnight, more NEt(iPr) 2 (0.40 mL) and t-butyl bromoacetate (0.30 mL) were added, and after one more night of stirring, the mixture was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 C1 2 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2 C1 2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2 S0 4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH 2 C12:2% NH 3 MeOH before part of the free base was converted to the HC1 salt with 1.0 M HC1 in Et 2 0 with stirring in ice-H 2 0. The residue was sonicated in hexane to yield (±)-122HC1 (0.1610 g, 25%, unoptimized): m.p. (HCI salt) 143 C (dec); 1H NMR (free base, CDC1 3 6 1.39 9H, t-butyl), 1.43 9H, t-butyl), 1.65 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 1.9-4.1 (complex, 15H, 7 -CH 2 and 1 2.58 3H, -NCH 3 5.8 (m, -43- III, 6.2-7.4 (complex, 6H, aromatic). MS (FAB) 660. Anal. H, N) 47

N

3 0 5 C1 2 2HC1-0.5CH 3

CN.

Example 41 2 3 ,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N.{f±..trans.2. I -Pyrrolidinyl-7-1N,N-bis- (carboxymethyl)aminol-1 2 3,4-tetrahydronaphth-1 -yilacetamide ADL-0t-0044- A solution of (0.35 g, 0.5 mmol) in 1:1 AcOH and 3 N HC1 (8 mL) with some anisole (2 drops) was stirred at 25 overnight before conc. HCl (0.5 mL) was added, and the mixture was warmed to 40 0 C for 1 h. Then some anisole (4 drops) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 25 TC for 5 h before it was evaporated. The residue was sequentially evaporated from iPrOH and PhCH 3 before it was sonicated with Et 2 O to yield (±)-13-HCI (0.2360 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 160 T' (dec); 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.93 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2-4.3 (complex, 1 5H, 7 -CH 2 and I 2.79 3H, -NCH 3 5.93 J =10.7 Hz, 1H, 6.37 1H, aromatic), 6.68 J =8.8 Hz, 1Hi, aromatic), 7.00 J 8.1 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 7.40 J 8.1 Hz, I H, aromatic), 7.63 (in, 2H, aromatic). MS (FAB) 490 I-CH 2

CO

2 Anal. H, N) C 27 17 3

IN

3 0 5 C1 2 '1HC1.

.20 Examvle 42 2 -(3,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methy.N.1±1 -trans-2- I1-pyrrolidinyll-7- INN-bis- (ethoxycarbonylmethyl-aminol-1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphth-1 -vII acetamide S *ADL-01-0052-9) 25 With stirring in ice-H1 2 0 under N 2 ethyl bromoacetate (0.47 mL, 4.21 mmol) was added dropwise to a mixture of (0.3640 g, 0.842 mmol) and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.88 mL, 5.05 mmol) in dry THF (6 mL). After 10 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 T' under N 2 overnight before it wspartitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 C1 2 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2

CI

2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2 SOA) filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH 2

CI

2 :2%

NH-

3 1% MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and washed with Et 2 O to yield (±)-14-HC1 (0.27 g, m.p. (HCl salt) 128 T' (dee); 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.2 (in, 6H, 2 -CHA) 1.9 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2-4.4 (complex, 1 9H, 9

CH

2 and 1 2.78 3H, -NCH 3 5.9 J 10.3 Hz, 6.14 1H, aromatic), 6.49 J 8.2 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 6.91 J 8.3 Hz, IlH, aromatic), 7.39 J Hzk ,aoai) inl, 2-1-1, aromatdic). MS1 (FAB$) m/z 605. Anal. H, N)

C

31

H-

39

N

3 0 5 C1 2 -1.25H10.03CHCN.

Example 43 2 3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl.N-[ 1U)-trans-2-(l-pvrrolidinyl)..7-(Ndiethylphosphoramidato.amino)23,4tetrahydronaphth lviacetamide ADL-01-0053-7) With stirring in ice-H 2 0 under N 2 diethyl chlorophosphate (0.57 mL, 3.92 mmol) was added dropwise to a mixture of (0.3393 g, 0.785 mmol) and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.82 mL, 4.71 mmol) in dry THF (6 mL). After 10 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 0 C under N 2 overnight before the mixture was evaporated and dried in vacuo. The residue was partitioned between sat'd -44- NaHCO 3 and CH 2

CI

2 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2

CI

2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH- 2 Cl 2

NH

3 1.5% MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2 O and sonicated in Et 2 O to yield 15*HCl (0.4205 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 247-249 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.2 (in, 6H, 2 -CH 3 1.95 (hr s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2-4.1 (complex, 1 5H, 7 -CH 2 and 1 2.75 3H, -NCH 3 5.98 J 10.3 Hz, IH, 6.7 lH, aromatic), 6.9 (in, IHI, aromatic), 7.03 J 8.4 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 7.3 (d of d, J 2 Hz and 8.2 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 7.6 (in, 2H, aromatic), 7.92 J 9.7 Hz, -NHP). MS (FAB) m/z 568. Anal. H, N)

C

27

H

36

N

3 0 4

PC

2 HCl0.25H 2 0.

Example 44 2-34Dclrpey)Nmty- f±-rn--lproiiyl7[N-2- (diethylnhosphorI)ethyl-aminol..1.

2 3 4 -tetrahydronaphth-l-yllacetarnjde ADL-01-0070-1) Wih sirrig i iceH 2 0unde N'diethyl 2-bromnoethylphosphonate (0.8601 g, 3.52 inmol) was added to a mixture of (0.3042 g, 0.704 minol) and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.74 mL, 4.2 mmol) e*:sin dry THF (4 mL). After 10 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 0 C under N 2 for 2.5 days before more diethyl 2 -bromoethylphosphonate (0.8546 g) and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.74 mL, 4.2 inmol) *were added. After stirring for 14 more days, the mixture was evaporated to dryness and dried in vacuo before the residue was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 Cl 2 The aqueous *fraction was extracted with more CH 2 Cl 2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH 2

CI

2

NH

3 MeOH and then by radial chromatography eluting with

CH

2

CI

2

NH

3 The product was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2 O and solidified by evaporation from CH 2 Cl 2 and sonication with Et 2 O to yield (+)-16*HCI (0.2466 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 151 0 C (dcc); 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.24 J 7 Hz, 6H, 2 -CH 3 1.93 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2-4.3 (complex, 19H, 9 -CH 2 and 1 2.8 3H, NCHA) 5.96 J 10.2 Hz, IlH, 6.69 (br s, IlH, aromatic), 6.87 J 7.5 Hz, I1H, :aromatic), 7.11 J 8.1 Hz, IlH, aromatic), 7.43 J 8.3 Hz, I1H, aromatic), 7.64 (in, 2H, *aromatic). MS(FAB) mz596. Anal. H, N) C 29

H

40

N

3 0 4 PC1 2 -2HCl.

Example 2-(,4-ichoroheni)-N- 1 1 dhv1- i±-trans- 2 -(i-Dyrrolidinvi',-6-methox-7-(Nbenzvl-N-methylaminosulfonyl).1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphth-1 -vii acetamide 9, ADL- 01-0090-9).

ADL-01-0090-9 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.6213 g, 1.40 mmol), 3,4-dichlorophenylacetic acid (0.5764 g, 2.81 minol), DCC (0.5951 g, 2.88 inmol), and pyr (0.23 mL, 2.88 mmol). The product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 MeOH and further purified by radial chromatography eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 The product was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O to yield (±)-19-HCl (0.3 g, m.p. (HCl salt) 150 0 C (dee); 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.91 (br s, 4H1, -CH 2

CH

2 2.2 4.1 (complex, 1 I1H, 5 -CH 2 and 1 2.55 3H, -NCH 3 ),2.77 3H, -NCH 3 ),3.88 3H, -OCH 3 4.2 2H, -CH 2 Ph), J =9.7 Hz, IH, 7.10 1H, aromatic), 7.2-7.4 (complex, 7H, aromatic), 7.55 (in, 2H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 630. Anal. H, N) C 32

H

37

N

3 0 4

C

2 SHCIO0.5H 2 0.

Example 46 2 3 ,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N- I(±)-trans-2-(l-pyrrolidinyi)-7-(N-benzylNmethvlaminosufonvl..1 2,3,4-tetrahydronaphth-1 -viiacetamide ADL-01 -0099-0) ADL-01-0099-0 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.4530 g, 1.095 mmol), 3,4-dichlorophenylacetic acid (0.4485 g, 2.19 mmol), DCC (0.4677 g, 2.27 mmol), and pyr (0.18 mL, 2.26 mmol). The product was purified by flash column eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 NH1 3 and then by radial chromatography eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 :2%

NH-

3 The product was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and then washed with hot MeOH to yield (±)-20-HCl (0.33 g, m.p. (HCl salt) 251-254 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.97 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.3-4.2 (complex, 1 3H, 6 -Cl- 2 and 1 2.49 3H, -NCH 3 2.90 3H1, -NCHA) 6.17 J 10.4 Hz, I1H, 7.2-7.8 (complex, 1 I1H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 600. Anal. H, N) C 3

IH

35

N

3 S0 3 C1 2 HCl.

Example 47 20 2 2 -Nitro-4,5-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N (±)-trans-2-(l-pyrrolid inyl)-indan..1 20: viacetamide ADL-01-0104-8) ADL-01-0104-8 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.4265 g, 1.971 mmol), 2 -nitro-4,5-dichlorophenylacetic acid (0.9859 g, 3.943 mimol), DCC (0.8350 g, 4.047 mmol), and pyr (0.33 mL, 4.06 mmol). The crude product was purified by silica gel column eluting with CH 2

CI

2

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCI salt with M HCl in Et 2 O and crystallized from MeOH to yield (±)-24-HC1 (0.3630 g, 38%, first crop): m.p. (HCl salt) 284-287 0 C; 'H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.8-2.1 (br s, 4H,

CH

2

CH

2 2.84 3 H, -NCH 3 3- 4.4 (complex, 9H, 4 -CH 2 and 1 6.3 7 J =8 Hz, lH, 7.08 (br s, 1H, aromatic), 7.3 (in, 3H, aromatic), 7.92 1H, aromatic), 8.41 (s, 1H1, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 448. Anal. H, N) C 22

H

23

N

3 0 3 C1 2

HCI.

Example 48 2 2 -Nitro- 4 -trifluoromethypheny)Nmethy1N1[(trans2.(lDvrrolidinV)indan-l vil1acetamide ULO-26, ADL-0-0106-3) ADL-01-0106-3 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.3229 g, 1.492 minol), 2 -nitro- 4 -trifluoromethylphenylacetic acid (0.5579 g, 2.24 inmol), DCC (0.5512 g, 2.67 inmol), and pyr (0.19 mL, 2.31 minol). The crude product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with CH 2

CI

2

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and crystallized from MeOH-Et 2 O to yield (±)-26-HC1 (0.3 643 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 249-250 0 C; 1 H NMR (HC1 salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.8-2.1 (br s, 4H,

CH

2

CH

2 2.89 3H, -NCHA) 3-4.6 (complex, 9H, 4 -CH 2 and 1 6.40 J 8.1 Hz, 1H, 7.1 (br s, 1H, aromatic), 7.3 (in, 3H, aromatic), 7.83 J =8.1 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 8.17 J 7.8 Hz, III, aromatic), 8.41 IIH, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 448.

Anal. H, N) C 23

H

24

N

3 0 3

F

3

,HCI.

Example 49 2,-ihnlNmty--()tas2(IProiiy)idnlylctmd ADL-01-0108-9) ADL-O01-108-9 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.2615 g, 1.209 mmol), diphenylacetic acid (0.5123 g, 2.41 mmol), DCC (0.5138 g, 2.49 mmol), and pyr (0.20 mL, 2.5 mmol). The crude product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2

O

and crystallized from MeOH to yield (±)-28,HCI (0.3815 g, m.p. (HCl salt) >300 0

C;

1H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 the cis-trans rotamers are observed in about 3.6 to 1 ratio.

Only peaks for the major rotamer are reported.) 81.88 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.75 3H4,

NCH

3 3-4.2 (complex, 7H, 3 -CH 2 and 1 5.61 IlH, 6.5 J 8 Hz, I1H, 6.88 J 6.5 Hz, lH, aromatic), 7.1-7.4 (complex, 13 H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 411. Anal. H, N) C 28

H

3

N

2 0HCl'0.75 H420.

*see Example

S.S

2 4 -Methlsulfonlpheny)NmethyN±)trans2.(l..vrrolidinvI)-indan-l S S vlacetamide ADL-01-0109-7) ADL-0 1-0109-7 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from (0.327 1 g, 1.51 mmol), 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid (0.6464 g, 3.017 mmol), DCC so 0 (0.6438, 3.12 mmol), and pyr (0.25 mL, 3.1 mmol). The product was purified by gravity column eluting with CH 2

CI

2

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and crystallized from MeOH-Et 2 O to yield (+)-29-HCI (0.5295 g, m.p. (HCl salt) 246-248 0 C; 1H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.8-2 (br s, 4H, -CH 2 Cl 2 2.81 3H,

NCH

3 2.9-4.2 (complex, 9H, 4 -CH 2 and 1 3.21 3H, -SO 2 CHA) 6.4 J =8.1 Hz, 114, aromatic), 7 (in, 114, aromatic), 7.3 (in, 3H, aromatic), 7.58 J 8.1 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 7.9 J 7.8 Hz, 2H1, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 413. Anal. H, N)

C

23

H

28

N

2 S0 3 HC1-0.25H 2 0.

Compounds of formula III Compounds having the following structrues were prepared.

A

C

ND

Me

A

\\H

C, N,

N

Me 1, ADL-01-0007-3, A=-Nq 2, ADL-03-1066, A=(R)-NHC(O)CqCH2CH(NH2)(CO2H) 3, ADL-01-0006-5, A=(S)-NHC(O)CH2CH(NH2)(CO2H) 4, ADL-01-0008-1, A=(R)-NHC(O)CH(Nq)(CH2Co2H) ADL-01-0009-9, A=(S)-NHC(O)CH(N142)(CH2CO2H) 6, ADL-01-0010-7, A=(SS)-NHC(O)CH(Cqco2H)NHC(O)CH(CH2CO2H)(NH2) 7, ADL-0 1 -00 11-5, A=-N(SQMe)2 Compounds 1-5 were prepared by the method described in Chang, Ph.D.

Thesis, University of Minnesota-Twin Cities, 1995.

ND

8, X=-NO 9, ADL-0 1 -0 113-9, X=-NFt, Z=2-NH2 ADL-0 1 -0 115-4, X=-Nq, Z=2-NO2 11, ADL-0 1 -0 124-6, X=-NHPqEt2, Z=2-NHP03Et2 12, ADL-01-0126-1, X=-N(SQMe)2, Z=2-N(SO Me)2 13, ADL-01-0128-7, X=-Nq, Z=2-NO2-4,5-CI2 14, ADL-01-0129-5, X=-Nq, Z=4-methylsulfonyl ADL-0 1 -0 132-9, X=-Nq, Z=4-NH2 16, ADL-01-0133-7, X=-Nq, Z=4-N(SQMe)2 17, ADL-0 1 -0 136-0, X=-Nq, Z=4-N(SQMe)2 18, ADL-01-0138-6, X=-Nq, Z=4-NHBoc 19, ADL-01-0139-4, X=-NHPqEt2, Z=4-N(SO2Me)2 Compounds 9-19 were prepared from the appropriate arylacetic acids via DCC/pyr coupling, followed by reduction, deprotection, and/or derivatization via known chemistry. Intermediate 8 was prepared via the method described in Chang, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Minnesota-Twin Cities, 1995.

H\

21, ADL-0 1-0055-2, R 1

R

2 =2-nitrophenyl 22, ADL-O 1 -0056-0, 1

R

2 =2-N0 2 -4,5-C1 2 -phenyl 23, ADL-01-0059-0 (EMD 60400), R 1

R

2 =2-NH 2 -phenyl 24, ADL-Ol1 -0063 -6 (EMD 6175 R R 2 =phenyl ADL-O1-0064-4,

R

1

R

2 4 -methylsulfonylphenyl 26, ADL-0l-0067-7, RN=-H, R 2 =2-N0 2 -4-CF 3 -phenyl 27, ADL-01-0076-8,

R

1

R

2 =2-NH 2 -4-CF 3 -phenyl *97,8 9999 Intermediate 20 was prepared via minor modifications of known methods.

7 Cornpounds 23 (EMD6O400) and 24 (EMD6 1753) are known compounds that were synthesized in-house via I minor modifications of reported methods.

9 Compounds 21, 22 and 25-27 were prepared by DCC coupling, following by reduction where applicable.

Ref.

Costello, G. F. et al. J. Med. Chem. 1991, 34, 181-189.

0 10 Naylor, A. et al. J. Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 2138-2144.

Gottschlich, R. et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Letters 1994, 4, 677-682.

0 Example 51 0 15 2 3 4 -Dichloronhenvl)-N-methvlNfI1S...p[N..(-s..

2 5 prj acid-a-amide-S-aspartic acida-amido)-3-aminophenyl1-2- R -yrroidinyll ethyl) acetamide ADL-01-0010-7) 99 99, 9999 9 With stirring in ice-H 2 0 under N 2 l,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC, 0.353 g, 1.711 mmol) and dry CH 2 C1 2 (2 mL) were added to a mixture of 5-t-butyl ester (0.311 g, 0.53 8 mmol), N-Boc-L-aspartic acid-b-t-butyl ester (0.495 g, 1.711 mmol), and 1hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBT, 0.232 g, 1.717 mmol) in dry C11 2 C1 2 (8 mL). After 5 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 0 C under overnight before 1420,O (1 my) wa aded and the4 mixture was filtered through celite. The 1,3-dicyclohexylurea (DCU) was washed with

CH

2

CI

2 (18 mL). The filtrate was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 C1 2 which was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. After flash column chromatography eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 MeOH, the protected intermediate (0.411 g, 90%) was dissolved in 3N HCI (4 mL), AeOH (4 mL) with anisole (2 drops), and stirred at 25 TC overnight. The mixture was then evaporated to dryness, and evaporation from iPrOH then yielded ADL-0l1-00 10-7: 1 HNMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 2.0 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9 (s, 3H, -NCH 3 (br m, 114, MS (FAB) m/z 636. Anal. H, N) C 29

H

35

N

5 0 7 C1 2 HCl,0.25iPrOIJ.

-49- Example 52 2-(3,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl.N-. 111S1-1-fN-(bis-methylsulfonamido).3 aminophenvll-2- [1-pyrrolidinyfi ethyllacetamide ADL-01-001 With stirring at 25 0 C, a solution of methanesulfonyl chloride (MsCI, 0.25 mL, 3.2 mmol) in dry CI- 2 C1 2 (0.75 mL) was added to a mixture of ADL-01-0007-3 (0.225 g, 0.554 mmol) and Et 3 N (1 mL, 7 mmol) in dry CH 2 Cl 2 (4 mL), and the mixture was stirred at 25 TC fitted with a drying tube. After 5 h, more CH 2

CI

2 (6 mL), MsCl (0.5 mL), and Et 3 N (2 mL) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 25 TC overnight before it was partitioned between CH 2 Cl 2 mL) and sat'd NaHCO 3 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2

CI

2 (25 mL), and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated.

Acetonitnile was used to azeotrope off Et 3 N before the product was gravity column chromatographed twice eluting with CH 2

CJ

2 Nl 3 MeOll. The pure product was then treated with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2 O to yield 7HCI (0.131 g, 39%, unoptimized): m.p. (HCl salt) 145 TC (dec); 'H NMR (free base, CDCl 3 6 1.7 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.4-3.8 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 2.7 3H, -NCHA) 3.37 6H, 2 -SO 2

CH

3 6.1 (in, IlH, 7.1-7.4 (complex, :7H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 562. Anal. H, N) C2 3 17 29

N

3 0 5

S

2 C21H0l0.75H- 2 0o Example 53 2-(2-Nitrophenyl)-N-methyl.N-. (1S)-1 3 -nitrophenyl)-2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)ethyllaeetamide ADL-01-0115-4) U ADL-01-01 15-4 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from 8 (1.4886 g, 5.97 mmol), 2-nitrophenylacetic acid (2.1619 g, 11.93 mmol), DCC (2.5402 g, 12.31 mmol), and pyridine (1.00 mL, 12.36 mmol). The crude product was converted to the HCI salt with Et 2 O-HCI without chromatography and crystallized from MeOH-Et 2 O. The first crop was recrystallized again from MeOH-Et 2 O to yield 10,HCl (1.3663 g, 5 m.p. (HCl salt) 258- 259 'H4 NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.97 (br s, 4H4, -CH 2

CH

2 2.91 3H, -NCH 3 3.11-4.45 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 6.17 (in, lH, 7.51-8.25 (complex, 8H, aromatic).

:30 MS (FAB) m/z 413. Anal. H, N) C 2 1

H

24

N

4 0 5 HCl-0.25H 2 0.

Example 54 2 -(2-Aminophenyl)-N-methyl-N (1 S)-1-(3-aminophenvl)-2-(l1- Pyrrolidinylbethvllacetamide ADL-01-01 13-9) With stirring at 55 0 C, Raney nickel was added in small quantities to a mixture of 10 (0.9857 g, 2.3899 mmol) and hydrazine hydrate 2 mL) in EtOil (30 mL) until gas evolution stopped in about 10 min. The mixture was then filtered through celite, and the Raney nickel was washed with hot MeOH (100 mL). The filtrate was evaporated and dried in vacuo before the residue was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and C11 2 C0 2 which was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with CJJCl 3

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HCl salt with Et 2

O-

HCl to yield 9,3HCl (0.3 159 g, 29%, unoptimized): m.p. (HCl salt) 219-222 1 1- NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 61.98 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.87 3H, -NCHA) 3.2-4.3 (complex, 8H, 4 6.1 (in, lH, 7.11-7.45 (complex, 8H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 353. Anal.

H, N) C 2 jH 28

N

4 03HClO0.25fH 2

O.

Example 2-(N-DiethvI nhosphoramidate-2-aminophenvi)Nmethy-N[(lS)1l(N-diethyI Dhosphoramidate-3-aminopheny1)-2-(1-pyrroidiny)ethyJ acetamide (11, ADL-01-0124- With stirring in ice-H4 2 0 under N 2 diethyl chlorophosphate (0.53 mL, 3.67 mmol) was added to a mixture of 9 (0.2394 g, 0.6792 minol) and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.77 mL, 4.40 mmol) in dry TI-F mL). After 10 minl, the mixture was stirred at 25 TC under N 2 for 3.5 days before it was diluted with CH 2

CI

2 evaporated, and dried in vacuo. The residue was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 C1 2 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH4 2 0 2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was chromatographed eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 2% NH1 3 2% MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2 O and crystallized from iPrOH-Et 2 O to yield 11'HCl (0.2364 g, m.p. (HCl salt) 184-186 0 C; 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.2 (in, 12H, 4 -CH 3 1.96 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.81 311, -NCHA) 3-4 (complex, 16H, 8

CH

2 6.05 (in, IlH, 6.7-7.3 (complex, 9H, aromatic and 1 NH), 8.08 J 9.4 Hz, I1H, NHP). MS (FAB) m/z 625. Anal. H, N) C 29 H1 46

N

4 0 7

P

2

HCI.

:25 Example 56 2 -(N-Bis-sulfonamido-2-aminophenyl).N.methvl..Ntf(1S)-1-(N-bis-sulfonamido-3.

aminophenyl)-2-(1-nyrrolidinyl)ethvl1 acetamide (12, ADL-01 -0126-1) With stirring at 0 TC under N 2 MsCl (0.61 mL, 7.87 inmol) was added to a mixture of 9 (0.2774 g, 0.787 inmol) and Et 3 N (2.2 mL, 15.7 minol) in CH 2

CI

2 (8 mL). After 10-15 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 TC under N 2 overnight before the mixture was partitioned a. between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 Cl 2 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2 Cl 2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. Acetonitrile was added to azeotrope off Et 3 N. The product was flash-column chromatographed eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 2% NH 3 before it was converted to the HCl salt with M H4CI in Et 2 O to yield 11-1H0 l (0.56 g, 65%. mp Hisl) 8 C HNR(~ salt, DMSO-d 6 8 2.0 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.76 3H, -NCHA) 3-4.3 (complex, 8H, 4

CH

2 3.53 12 H, 4 -SO 2 CHA) 6.25 (in, 1H, 7.3-7.6 (complex, 814, aromatic). MS (FAB) in/z 665. Anal. H, N) C25H36N 4 0 9

S

4 HCl'MeOH.

Example 57 pyrrolidinvl)ethyllacetamnide (13. ADL-01-0128-7) ADL-01-0128-7 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from 8 (0.3690 g, 1.4801 mmol), 2 -nitro-4,5-dichlorophenylacetic acid (0.7301 g, 2.920 iniol), DCC (0.6213 -51g, 3.01 mmol), and pyridine (0.24 mL, 3.01 mmol). The crude product was converted to the HC1 salt with Et 2 O-HCI without chromatography and crystallized from MeOll to yield 13-HCI (0.3232 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 165 TC (dee); 1 H4 NMR (HC1 salt, DMSO-d 6 8 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.93 3H, -NCFI 3 3.1-4.3 (complex, 6H, 3 -CH 2 4.4 2H, benzyhic methylene), 6.2 (in, I1H, 7.7-7.8 (in, 2H, aromatic), 7.9 IlH, aromatic), 8.14 1H, aromatic), 8.27 J 7.7 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 8.43 lH, aromatic). MS (FAB) in/z 481. Anal. H, N) C2lH22N 4 0 5

C

2 Example 58 2 4 -Methvlsulfonylnhenl)-Nmethvl-N4F(1S)-l-(3-nitropheny)-2-(l..

Pyrrolidinvl)ethyll acetamide (14, ADL-O1-0129-5) ADL-01-0129-5 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling procedure from 8 (0.5138 g, 2.061 mmol), 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid (0.8825 g, 4.119 minol), DCC (0.8771 g, 4.251 mmol), and pyridine (0.34 mL, 4.245 iniol). The crude product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with CHCl 3

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and crystallized from MeOH to yield 14-HCI (0.4695 g, in.p. (HCl salt) 276-277 'H NMR (HC1 salt, DMSO-d 6 8 2.0 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.92 3H, NCHA) 3.2 3H, -SO 2 CHA) 3.2-4.3 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 6.25 (in, I H, 7.61 J 20 =7.2 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 7.75 (in, 2H, aromatic), 7.89 J =7 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 8.12 I1H, aromatic), 8.25 (in, I H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 446. Anal. H, N) C 22

H

27

N

3 0 5

S-HCI.

Example 59 .9 5 2 -(N-Butyvloxycarbonyl-4-aminopheny)NmethylN-[ (1 S)-l-(3-nitrophenyl)-2-(1- Pvrrolidinvl~ethvllacetamide (18, ADL-O1-0138-6) ADL-01-0138-6 was prepared via the general DCC/pyr coupling method from 8 (1.9948 g, 8.001 mmol), N-Boc-4-aininophenylacetic acid (3.0589 g, 12.173 mmol), DCC (2.6602 g, 12.89 minol), and pyridine (1.04 inL, 12.9 inmol). The crude product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 2% NH 3 1% MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2 O and crystallized from MeGH to yield 18-HCI (0.4891 g, 12,first crop): m.p. (HCl salt) 170 TC (dec); 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.49 9H, tbutyl), 2.01 (br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.83 3H, -NCHA) 3.1-4.15 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 6.27 (in, 1H, 7.17 J 8 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 7.39 J 8 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 7.7 (in, 2H, aromatic), 8.09 lH, aromatic), 8.23 J 6 Hz, lH, aromatic), 9.3 IH, -NHBoc).

MS (FB 83 1l C- 26

HL

34

N-

4 5 r1-VZ *H2 H Example 2 4 -Aminophenl)-NmethlN[(S)1(3-nitrophenv1)2-(l Pvrrolidinylbethvllacetamide (15. ADL-01-0132-9) ADL-0l1-0 138-6 (2.9211 g, 6.053 inmol) and anisole (2 drops) were mixed in AcOH (10 mL) and 4N HCl (10 mL) and stirred at 25 0 C overnight, fitted with a drying tube. The mixture was adjusted to pH 13 with IN NaOH with stirring in ice-H 2 0 and then extracted with

CH

2 Cl 2 (2 X 70 mL). The combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with -52- CHCl 3

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCl salt with Et 2 O-HCI to yield (0.5531 g, 22%, unoptimized): m.p. (HCJ salt) 200 TC (dcc); 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.98 (hr s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.86 3H, -NCHA) 3.2-4.3 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 6.25 (in, IH, 7.16 J =7.4 Hz, 2 H, aromatic), 7.33 J 7.5 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 7.7 (in, 2H, aromatic), 8.08 lH, aromatic), 8.23 (in, IH, aromatic). MIS (FAB) m/z 383. Anal. H, N) C 21

H

26

N

4 0 3 2HCl0.75H 2 0.

Example 61 2 -(N-Bis-sulfonamido-4-aminohenl)Nmethl.N.I(1S)-l-(3-nitrophenyl)-2-(l.

Pvrrolidinvlbethyllacetamide (16, ADL-O1-0133-7) With stirring in ice-H1 2 0 under N 2 a solution of MsCI (1.56 mL, 20.17 inmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (6 mL) was added dropwise over 2-3 min to a mixture of 15 (1.5430 g, 4.0344 minol) and Et 3

N

(5.6 mL, 40 iniol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (24 mL). After 10 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 TC under

N

2 overnight before the mixture was partitioned between CH 2 Cl 2 and sat'd NaHCO 3 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2 Cl 2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. Acetonitrile was added to azeotrope off Et 3 N before the crude product was flash column chroinatographed eluting with 0 CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 The product was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O and washed with hot MeOH to yield 16-HCI (1.3091 g, 56%, first crop): m.p. (HCl salt) 257-259 0 C;'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.99 (br s, 4H1, -CH 2

CH

2 2.87 3H, -NCHA) 3.15- 4.3 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH- 2 3.51 6H, 2 -SO 2

CH

3 6.25 (mn, 1H, 7.4 (in, 4H, aromatic), 7.7 (mn, 2H, aromatic), 8.1 III, aromatic), 8.21 (in, 1H, aromatic). MIS (FAB) mlz 539. Anal. H, N) C23H 3 0

N

4

O

7

S

2 HCI-0.5CH 2

C

2 Example 62 2 -(N-Bis-sulfonamido-4-aminophenyl)N-methyl.N-1(1S)-l-(3-aminOphenyl)-2-(l..

pyrrolidinvljethyll acetamide (17, ADL-1-0136-0) ADL-01-0136-0 was prepared from 16 (1.0729 g, 1.992 inmol), Raney nickel, and hydrazine 0 hydrate (2 mL) in EtOH (30 mL). The conditions were similar to those used for the preparation of 9. The product was gravity column chromatographed eluting with CH 2 Cl 2 :2%

NH

3 and the pure fractions were converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HCl in Et 2 O to yield 17-HCI (0.1194 g, 11%, unoptimized): in.p. (HCI salt) 252-255 0 C; 'H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 6 2.0 (hr s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.86 3H, -NCHA) 3.1-4.2 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 (sI, 2. ICH) 61ll 1 i (complex, 8H, aromatic). MIS (FAB) m/z 509. Anal. H, N) C 23

H

32

N

4 0 5

S

2 1.75HC1.

Example 63 2 -(N-Bis-sulfonamido-4-aminophenyl)..N.methyl..N..(S)1(N-diethyI Phosphoramidate- 3 -aminophenyl)-2-(l-pyrrolidinvl)ethvl1 acetamide (19, ADL-01-0139-4) With stirring in ice-H4 2 0 under N 2 diethyl chlorophosphate (0.84 mL, 5.81 inmol) was added to a mixture of 17 (0.73 83 g, 1.4514 minol) and NEt(iPr) 2 (1.5 inL, 8.7 mmol) in dry THF mL). After 10 min, the mixture was stirred at 25 TC under N 2 overnight before more THF mL), NEt(iPr) 2 (0.76 inL), and diethyl chlorophosphate (0.42 mL) were sequentially added.

After 3 h, the mixture was quenched with H 2 0, diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 evaporated, and dried in -53- -r vacuo. The residue was partitioned between CH 2 C12 and sat'd NaHCO 3 The aqueous fraction was extracted with more CH 2 C1 2 and the combined organic fraction was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through celite, and evaporated. The crude product was flash column chromatographed eluting with CH 2

CI

2

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et20 and crystallized from MeOH to yield 19 HC1 (0.3274 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 245-247 OC; 'H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.193 J 7 Hz, 6H, 2 -CH 3 1.95 (br s, 4H,

-CH

2

CH

2 2.81 3H, -NCH 3 3.1-4.1 (complex, 12H, 6 -CH 2 3.52 6H, 2 -SO 2

CH

3 6.1 1H, 6.79 J 7.3 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 6.91 1H, aromatic), 6.99 J 7.7 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 7.23 J 7.8 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 7.36 J 8.3 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 7.44 J 8.6 Hz, 2H, aromatic), 8.09 J 9.4 Hz, 1H, -NHP). MS (FAB) m/z 645. Anal. (C, H, N) C 27

H

41

N

4 0 8

S

2 PHC1.

Example 64 2-(2-Nitrophenvl)-N-methyvl-N-[ S1-l-phenyl-2-fl-(3S)-(3- 15 hydroxvpyrrolidinyl)lethyl}acetamide (21, ADL-01-0055-2).

With stirring at 25 °C under N 2 DCC (0.160 g, 0.79 mmol) was added to a mixture of 2nitrophenylacetic acid (0.140 g, 0.79 mmol) and pyridine (0.064 mL, 0.79 mmol) in CH 2 C12 mL). After 3 min, a solution of 20 (0.160 g, 0.72 mmol) in CH 2 C1 2 (1.5 mL) was added, followed by NEt(iPr) 2 (0.375 mL, 2.15 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 25 °C under N2 overnight before sat'd NaHCO 3 was added, and the mixture was filtered through celite. The DCU was washed with a little CH 2 C1 2 and the filtrate was partitioned between sat'd NaHCO 3 and CH 2 C1 2 which was dried (MgS04), filtered through celite, and evaporated. Toluene was added to azeotrope off pyridine. The product was flash column chromatographed eluting with CHCl 3

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCI in 25 and crystallized from MeOH to yield 21 HCI (0.14 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 226-227 OC; 'H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.8-2.4 2H,-CH 2 2.86 3H, -NCH 3 3-4.5 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 5.5 1H, -CHOH), 6.1 1H, 73-7.8 (complex, 8H, aromatic), 8.11 J 8 Hz, 1H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 384. Anal. H, N) C 21

H

25

N

3 0 4 HCl0.5H 2 0.

Example 2-(2-Nitro-4,5-dichlorophenvi)-N-methv SI-l-phenvl-2-[1-(3S)-(3hydroxvpyrrolidinvl)lethyllacetamide (22, ADL-01-0056-0) ADL-01-0056-0 was prepared from 20 (0.2 g, 0.91 mmol), 2 acid (0.45 g, 1.8 mmol), DCC (0.37 g, 1.8 mmol), NEt(iPr) 2 (0.48 mL, 2.7 mmol), and pyridine (0.15 mL, 1.8 mmol). The conditions are similar to those for the preparation of 21.

The product was column chromatographed eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HC1 salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et20 and crystallized from iPrOH to yield 22HCI (0.060 g, m.p. (HCI salt) 231-233 °C (dec); 'H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.8-2.4 2H, -CH 2 2.85 3H, -NCH 3 3.1-4.5 (complex, 8H, 4 -CH 2 5.5 1H, CHOH), 6.1 1H, 7.2-7.5 5H, aromatic), 7.88 1H, aromatic), 8.42 1H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 452. Anal. H, N) C 21

H

23

N

3 0 4 C1 2 HC1.

-54- Example 66 2-(4-Methylsulfonylphenyl)-N-methl-N..I 1Si -1-phen-yl-2- hydroxypyrroidinyl ethyl) acetamide (25, ADL-01-0064-4) ADL-0 1 -0064-4 was prepared from 20 (0.2 g, 0.91 mmol), 4 -methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid (0.41 g, 1.8 mmol), DCC (0.37 g, 1.8 mmol), pyridine (0.15 mL, 1.8 mmol), and NEt(iPr) 2 (0.48 mL, 2.7 mmol). The conditions are similar to those for the preparation of 21. After stirring at 25 TC overnight, more pyridine (0.075 mL, 0.9 mmol) and DCC 18 g, 0.9 mmol) were added, and the reaction was worked up the next day. The product was purified by radial chromatography eluting with CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 I% MeOH before it was converted to the HCl salt with 1.0 M HC1 in Et 2 O and washed with hot iPrOH to yield 25-HCI (0.15 g, 3 m.p.

(HCl salt) 240-241 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 6 1.8-2.4 (in, 2H, -CH 2 2.8 3H,

NCH

3 of cis and trans amide rotamers), 3.23 3H, -SO 2

CH

3 3.1-4.5 (in, 811I, 4 -Cl- 2 (in, IIH, -CHOH), 6.15 (in, 1H, 7.2-7.5 (in, 5H, aromatic), 7.55 (in, 2H, aromatic), 7.85 (in, 2H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 417. Anal. H, N) C 22

H

28

N

2 0 4 SHCl.

Examvle 67

S

2 2 -Nitro-4-trifluoromethylphenl)-Nmethvl-N 11 S1-1-phenvl-2-[I1-(3S)-(3hydroxyPyrrolidinyb] ethyl) acetamide (26, ADL-01-0067-7) With stirring at 25 TC under N 2 DCC (0.39 g, 1.9 minol) was added to a mixture of 2-nitro-4- 20 trifluoromethyiphenylacetic acid (0.47 g, 1.9 minol) and pyridine (0.15 mL, 1.9 minol) in CH1 2

CI

2 (10 mL). After 5 min, a solution of 20 (0.4 g, 1.8 mmol) in CH 2

CI

2 (5 mL) was added. After 2 h, more DCC (0.1 g, 0.5 minol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at T overnight before more 2 -nitro-4-trifluoroinethylphenylacetic acid (0.045 g, 0.18 inmol) adDCC (0.1 g, 0.5 inmol) were added. After 2 h, the reaction was worked up as in the preparation of 21. The product was purified by radial chromatography eluting with a~ CH 2 Cl 2

NH

3 before it was converted to the HCI salt with 1.0 M HCI in Et 2 O and 9. precipitated from CH 2

CI

2 to yield 26-HCI (0.050 g, 1H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 1.8-2.4 (in, 2H, -CH 2 2.87 3H1, -NCHA) 3.1-4.5 (complex, 8H4, 4 -CH 2 5.5 (in, I1H, CHOH), 6.1 (in, 1H, 7.2-7.5 (in, 5H, aromatic), 7.82 J 7.7 Hz, 1H, aromatic), 8.16 J 8 Hz, IlH, aromatic), 8.42 IlH, aromatic). MS (FAB) in/z 452. Anal. H, N) (XU-Z4&3113.- 41r IC Example 68 2 2 -Amino-4-trifluoromethlphenyl)-NmethvlN 111 S1-1-phenvl-2-I1-(3S)-(3hydroxypyrroidinyl)] ethyl) acetamide (27, ADL-01-0076-8) ADL-01-0076-8 was prepared from 26 (0.14 g, 0.31 inmol), Raney nickel, and hydrazine hydrate (0.2 mL) in EtOH (14 mL). The conditions were similar to those used for the preparation of 9. The product was purified by radial chromatography eluting with CHCl 3 :2%

NH

3 MeOH before it was converted to the HCl salt with Et 2 O-HCl to yield 27-HCI (0.11 g, 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 6 1.8-2.2 (in, 2H4, -CH 2 2.88 3H, -NCHA) 3.1-4.5 (complex, 9H, 4 -CH 2 and 1 -CHOH), 6.2 1H, 6.8-7.5 (complex, 8 H, aromatic).

MS (FAB) m/z 423. Anal. H, N) C 22

H

26

N

3 0 2 F3 HCI2.5H 2 0.

Compounds of Examples 69-91 were prepared from the appropriate arylacetic acids/acid chlorides via EDCI/DIPEA or DCC/pyridine couplings, followed by reduction, deprotection, and/or derivatization via known chemistry. Intermediate A was prepared via the method reported in J. Med. Chem., 34, 1991 pp. 181-189, Costello, G.F. et al.

1H

H

H

3 CHN (SH R N H

CH

3 A Compounds of Examples 69-91 General procedure for EDCI/DIPEA coupling.

To a solution of acid(1.1eq.)and 1-Hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate(HOBT;1.1eq.) in an icebath under N 2 was added 1-( 3 -Dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDCI;1.1eq.). The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes. A solution of the amine(1.0 eq.) in dry methlylene chloride was added drop-wise followed by N,N-Diisopropylethyamine The solution was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched with sat. sodium bicarbonate and separated from methylene chloride.

20 The organic layer was dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered through Celite, and evaporated. The crude *product was chromatographed and converted to the HC1 salt.

Example 69 2,2-Diphenyl-N-methyl-N- (1 S)-l-phenyl-2-(1-pyrrolidinvl)ethyllacetamide; ADL-01-0023-0 To a solution of Diphenylacetic acid(1.5g;7.3mmol)and pyridine(1.0mL;12.2mmol) in of dry methylene chloride at 25 degrees under N 2 was added 1,3 dicyclohexylcarbodiimide ,DCC(2.0g;9.8mmol). After 5 minutes, 28(1.0g;4.9mmol)in 20mL of dry methlylene chloride was added and the mixture was stirred overnight. TLC(95:5 methylene chloride:methanol with 2% ammonia) indicated all of the starting material was consumed. The reaction was quenched with sat. sodium bicarbonate and filtered through a Celite plug. The plug was rinsed with methylene chloride and the aqueous layer was extracted with methylene chloride.

The combined organic layers were dried (Na 2

SO

4 filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 2.2g of a light brown solid. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 8% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 1.7g(88%) of pure product which was treated with 1.OM HC1 in diethyl ether to give 29 as the HCI salt. 'H NMR (HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 8 2.0(br s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.7(s,3H, -NCH 3 -56- 6.2(br m,IH, 7.l-7.5(complex, 15H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 398. Anal.(C,H,N) C27H- 3

ON

2 0.HCI0..75H4 2 0.

Example N'..N'-Diphenyl-N-methyl-N- S)-l-phenyl-2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)ethyll urea; ADL-01-0027-1 To a 0 degree solution of 28(500mg;2.4mmol) and triethylamine(731mL;5.2mmol) in l~mL of dry methylene chloride under N 2 was added a solution of Diphenylcarbamnyl chloride(629mg;2.7mmol) in 5mL of dry methylene chloride. The solution was warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. TLC(95:5 methylene chloride: methanol with 2% ammonia) indicated the starting material was consumed. The reaction solution was concentrated to a residue, which was pre-adsorbed onto silica and purified using a stepwise gradient of 2% to7% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 350mg(36%) of pure product which was treated with 1 .M HCL in diethyl ether to give 30 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR (HCl salt, DMSO-d 6 8 2.0 (hr s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.5(s, 3H,-NCHA) 5.8(br,m, IH,-CLI- 7.1-7.5 (complex,1I5H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 399. Anal.(C,FI,N) *fee

C

26

F

29

N

3 0.HC.0.5H 2 0.

2 Example 71 2-(2-Nitrophenyl)-N-methyl-N- S)-l-phenyl-2-(1-Pyrrolidinyl)ethyll acetamide; ADL-01 -0030-5 ADL-01-0030-5 was prepared via the procedure described in the preparation of 29 from 28(0.6g;2.9mmol), 2-nitrophenylacetic acid 8g;4.4mmol), DCC(I1.2g;5 .8mmol), and pyridine(0. IlmL; 1.4mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 7% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 0 0.2g(20%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 31 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, DMSO-d 6 6 2.0(br s, 4H-, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(s, 3H,-NCH 3 9 6.l(br,m, 111, -CH-)7.3-8.1I(complex, 9H1, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 367. Anal. (C,HN)

C

2 lH 25

N

3 0 3

.HCI.

Example 72 2-(2-Nitro- 45-dichlorohenyl)-N-methyl-N-[(i S)-1-phenyl-2-(1rT.1.lidirybh ylla*cetamide; ADL-01-t00-9 ADL-01-0033-9 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28(1 .4g;6.9mmol), 2-nitro 4,5-dichlorophenylacetic acid(l .9g;7.6mmol), 11OBT(l .Og;7.6mmol), EDCI(l .4g;7.6mmol), and pyridine(0.8mL;10.3mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 5% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 2.0g(60%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 32 as the 11C1 salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, DMSO-d 6 6 s, 411, -C11 2

CH

2 2.9(s, 3H, -NCHA) 6.1(br, m, 111, 7.2-7.6(complex, aromatic), 7.9(s, 1H, aromatic), 8.4(s, 111, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 436. Anal. (C,H,N)

C

2 lH 23

N

3 0 3 C1 2 .HCl.0.25 1120.

Example 73 2-(4-Methylsulfonylphenyl)-N-methyl-N-I(1 S)-l-phenyl-2-(1- Pyrrolidinvljethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0036-2 ADL-01-0036-2 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28 (432mg;2.mmol), 4-Methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid(5O0mg;2.3mmol),

HOBT

(341 mg;2.5mmol), EDCI(483mg;2 .5mmol),and DIPEA(550mL;3.l1mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to4%MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford l6Omg(19%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 33 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, DMSO- 4) 6 2.0(br, s, 4H, -CU 2

CU

2 2.9(s, 3H, -NCFJ 3 3.2(s, -SO 2

CH

3 6.l1(br, m, I1H, 7.3 -7.5 (complex, 5H1, aromatic), 7.6(br, d, 2H, aromatic), 7.9(br, d, 2H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 400. Anal. C 22

H

28

N

2 0 3 S.HC1.0.5 H 2 0.

Example 74 2-(2-Methoxyphenyl)-N-methyl..N-[(lS)1--henyl-2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)ethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0049-5 ADL-01-0049-5 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28(5O0mg;2 .4mmol), 2-Methoxyphenylacetic acid(6 1 mg;3 .6mmol),HOBT(495mg;3 .6mmol), EDCI(700mg;3 .6mmol),and DIPEA(850mL;4.8mn'ol).The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to7% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 822mg(96%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 34 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR (free base, CDCl 3 61 .8(br, s, 4H, -CH 2

CLI

2 2.8(s, 3H, -Nd 3 3.8(s, 311, OCH 3 6.l1(br, m, 11H, 6.8-7.4(complex, 911, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 3 52.

Anal. C 22

H

28

N

2 0 2 .HCl.

AD-105- ADL-01-0054-5 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 2 8 (SO0mg;2.4mmol), Indole-3 -acetic acid(64 1mg;3 .6mmol), 1-101T(494mg;3 .6mmol), EDCI(700mg;3 .6mmol),and DIPEA(63 7mL;3 .6mmol).The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 7% MeOH: methylene chloride to afford 761mg(88%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give as the HCl salt. H NMR(HC1 salt, CD 3 OD) 6 2.1(br, s, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.8(s, 3H1,

NCH

3 6.3(br, m, 1II, 7 .l- 7 .7(complex, 9H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 361. Anal.

C

23

H

27

N

3 0.HCl.1.0 H120.

Example 76 2-(a,a,a-Trifluoro-p-tolyl)-N-methl-N-(1 S)-l-phenyl-2-(1- Pvrrolidinvlbethyllacetamide; ADL-01-0058-6 ADL-01-0058-6 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28(200mg; O.9mmol), (ax,a,a-Trifluoro-p-tolyl) acetic acid (239mg; 1.1mmol), HOBT( 157mg; 1.1mmol), EDCI(223mg; 1.1mmol), and DIPEA(2O3mL; 1.1mmol).The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to2% MeOH: methylene chloride to afford 354mg(93%) of pure product which was treated with 1.OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 36 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, CDC1 3 6 1 .8(br, s, 4H,

CH

2

CH

2 3.0(s, 3 H, NCHA) 6.4(br, mn, 11H, CH), 7.2-7.6(complex, 9H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 390. Anal. (C,HN) C 22 F-1 25

N

2 0F7 3 .H-1l.

Example 77 2-2Ntoa* fur--oS)--ehlN-(S--hey--I pyrrolidinvl~ethvllacetamide; ADL-01-0062-8 ADL-01-0062-8 was prepared via the general EDCIIDIPEA coupling procedure from 28(5O0mg;2 .4mmol), (2-Nitro-a,oc,a-trifluro-4-tolyl)acetic acid(728mg;2.9mmol), HOBT(395mg;2.9mmol),EDCI(559mg;2.9mmol), and DIPEA(5l1OmL;2.9mmol).The crude :25 product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to MeOH:methylene chloride to afford 786mg(74%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 37 as the HCI salt. NMR(HC1 salt, CDCI 3 d 2.0(br, s, 4H4, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(s, 3H, -NCHA) 6.3(br, mn, 114, CHI), 7.1-7.5(complex, 4H, aromatic), 7.8- 7.9(br, mn, 21H, aromatic), 8.3-8.4(br, s, 2H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 435. Anal. C 22

H

24

N

3 0 3

F

3 .HCl.

Example 78 2-(1-14-Chlorobenzovl)-5-methoxv-2-methvl indoe)-N-I(1S)-I-PhenYI-2-(1- Pyrrolidinvlbethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0078-4 ADL-01-0078-4 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28(1 O0mg;0.4mmol), (I -I[p-chlorobenzoyl)-5-methoxy-2-methyl indole-3-acetic acid (1 89mg;0.5mmol),HOBT(73mg;0.5nmmol), EDCI( 101 mg;0.Smmol), and DIPEA (l28mL;0.7mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 5% MeOH:methylene chloride to afford 200mg(79%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 38 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, CDCl 3 8 1.6-1.8(br, mn, 414, -CH 2

CH

2 2.3(b, s, 314, -CH 3 2.9(br, s,

NCH-

3 3.8(br, s, 3H-, -OCLI 3 6.7(br, mn, 11-1, 7.1-7.6(complex, 1214, aromatic).

MS(FAB) m/z 509. Anal. C 32

H

35

N

3 0 3

CI.HCI.

-59- Example 79 2 4 -Nitrophenyl)-N-methyl-N4I(1S)-l-phenyl-2-(l-pyrrolidinvl)ethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0079-2 ADL-01-0079-2 was prepared via the general EDCJ/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28(1 .5g;7.3mmol), 4-Nitrophenylacetic acid(2.Og;l11. Ommol), HOBT( 1.4g;l11.Ommol), EDCI(2. 1g;l11.Ommol),and DIPEA(2.5mL; 1 4.6mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of l%to 5% MeGH: methylene chloride to afford 2.5 g(93%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 39 as the HCI salt. I H NMR(HCI salt, CDC1 3 5 l.6(br, m, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.8(br, s, 3H, NCHA) 6.4(br, m,lH, 7 .1-7.5 (complex, 7H, aromatic), 8.0(br, d, 2h, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 367. Anal.

C

21

H

25

N

3 0 3 .HCl.

Example 2 -(3-Nitrophenyl)-N-methyl-N..I(1S)-l-nhenyl-2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)ethyllacetamide.

ADL-01 -0084-2 ADL-01-0084-2 was prepared via the general EDCI/DJPEA coupling procedure from 2 8 (l.5g;7.3mmol), 3-Nitrophenylacetic acid(2.Og;l l.Ommol), HOBT(l.4g;l 1.Ommol), EDCI(2. lg;l11.Ommol),and DIPEA(2.5mL; 14.6mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 5% MeOH:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 2.6g(100%) of pure product which was treated with 1.OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 40 as the HCl salt. 1H NMR(HCI salt, CDCl 3 8 2.0(br, m, 4H,

CH

2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.3(br, m, 11-, 7 2 -7.6(complex, 6H, aromatic), 7.8(br, d, 11-, aromatic), 8 .l-8.2(complex, 2H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 367. Anal. (C,H,N)

C

2 lH 25

N

3 0 3 .HCl. 0.5 C CExample 81 :2-(2-Pvridvl)-N-methvylN-1(1S)-1- phenyl-2-(1 -pyrrolidinyl)ethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0085-9 ADL-01-0085-9 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 280350m~o,1 I 7 mmol),2-Pyridylacetic cid; h1rclrde36-g,.8mi,

H

2 53mg; 1. 8mmol), EDCI(3 60mg; 1. 8mmol) and DIPEA(644mL;3 .7mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 5% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 4 00mg(72%) of pure product which was treated with 1 .Om HCl in diethyl ether to give 41 as the HCI salt. 1H NMR(free base, CDCI 3 8 1.7-1.9(br, m, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.8(br, s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.0-6.2(br, m, 111, 7.1- 7 8 (complex, 8H, aromatic), 8.5(br, d, 11-, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 323. Anal. (C,H,N)

C

20

H

25

N

3 0. 2 HCI. 0.5H 2 0- Example 82 2 -(3-Pyvridyl)-N-methyl-N-I(1 S)-l-phenyl-2-(l-pvrrolidinyl jethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0100-6 ADL-01-0100-6 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28 (1 2 Omg;O.Smmol), 3 -Pyridylacetic acid hydrochloride (11 Omg;0.6mmol),HOBT(85mg;o.6mmol), EDCI (1 2Omg;0.6mmol), and DIPEA (280mL; 1.5mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 6% MeOH:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 142mg(76%) of pure product which was treated with l.OM HIi in diethyl ether to give 42 as the HCl salt. H NMR(HC1 salt, CDCI 3 62. 1(br, mn, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, 3H, -NCHA) 6.2-6.3(br, mn, lH, 7 2 -7.3 (complex, 5H, aromatic), 7.8-7.9(br, t, 1H, aromatic), 8.6- 8.9(complex, 3H, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 323. Anal.

C

20

H

25

N

3 0.2 HCI. 1.25 H 2 0.

Examle 83 2 6 -Methoxy-a-methl.2.napthalene..N[(1 S)-i-phenyvl-2-(1 CC.. Pyrrolidinyl~ethyllacetamide; ADL-01-01 10-5 ADL-01-0110-5 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 2 8 2 0 0m;0.9mmol), 6 -Methoxy-a-methylb2.naphaleneacetic acid(2 17mg; 1.Ommol), HOBT (142mg; 1.Ommol), EDCJ(20 1mg; 1.Ommol), and DIPEA(256mL; 1.4mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 2% MeOH:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford l3Omg(33%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 43 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HCI salt, CDC1 3 6 1 3H, -CHA) 2.9(br, s, -NCHA) 3.9(s, -OCHA) 5.5(br, mn, 1H, 7.7(complex, 1 IlH, aromatic). MS(FAB) m/z 416. Anal. C 27

H

32

N

2 0 2 .HCI. 0.25 H 2 0.

Example 84 2 -(a~agcc-Trifluoro-3-tolyl)-N-methy-N-[(1S)-l-phenyl-2-(l- Pyrrolidinyl~ethvllacetamide; ADL-01-011 1-3 A DT-fl-011L3ws rrarA1 1 U~hf 1 TIT-%T"r A F-jj 11I-JU.1rh1 Coupling procedure firom 2 00mg;0.9mmol), (a,cc,a-Trifluoro-m-tolyl)acetic acid(2 14mg; 1.Ommol), HOBT (142mg; 1.Ommol), EDCI(20 1mg; 1.Ommol), and DIPEA(256mL; 1.4mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 6% MeOH:methylene chloride to afford 250mg(67%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 44 as the HCI salt. 'H NMR(HCI salt, CDC1 3 6 2.0(br, mn, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.4(br, mn, IlH), 7.l-7.7(complex, 9H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 390. Anal.

C

22

H

2 sN 2 0F 3

.HCI.

Example 2 4 -Pvridvl)-N-methyl-N-[(lS)-l-phenyl-2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)ethyll acetalide ADL-01-0122-0 ADL-01-0122-0 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28 (1 2Omg;0.Srnmol),4-Pyridylacetic acid hydrochloride( 1 SOmg;0. 8mmol), HOBT (11 7mg;0. 8mmol), EDCI( 166mg;0. 8mmol),and DIPEA(202mL; 1.1mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to MeOH:methylene chloride to afford 172mg(92%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 45 as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HCI salt, CDCl 3 6 2. 1 (br, mn, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, -NCH 3 6.3 (br, mn, 7.2-7.3 (complex, 5H, aromatic), 7.8(br, s, 2H, aromatic), 8.6(br, s, 2H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 323. Anal. C 2 oH 25

N

3 0. HCl 0.5 1120.

Example 86 .Pyrrolidinyl~ethyllacetamide; ADL-01-0123-8 20 ADL-01-0123-8 was prepared via the general EDCI!DIPEA coupling procedure from 2 8 2 0 0 mg;O.9mmol),(a,cz,c-Trifluoro-o-tolyl)acetic acid(239mg; 1.1 mmol), HOBT( 157mg; l.lmmol), EDCI(223mg;1.lmmol), and DIPEA(203mL;1.lmmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 4% MeOH:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 339mg(82%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 46 as the HCl salt. 1H NMR (HCL salt, CDC1 3 8 2.0(br, mn,

-CH

2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, -NCHA) 6.3(br, mn, IIH, 7.1-7.7(complex, 9H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 390. Anal. C 22 11 25

N

2 0F 3

HCL.

*Example 87 pyrrolidinyl)ethylJ acetamide; ADL-01-0125-3 ADL-01-0125-3 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 2' 3 U.YIU1UJk)/- d IL mg; 1 .VOmo), Ji1Ufl I (142mg; 1 .Ommol), EDCI(20 1mg; 1.Ommol), and DIPEA(256mL; 1.4mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 2% MeOH:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 240mg(66%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 47 as the HCl salt. 1H1 NMR(HC1 salt,

CDCI

3 8 0.8(d, 611, -(CH 3 2 211, -C11 3 2.0(br, mn, -CH 2

CH

2 2.3-2.4(d, 2H1, -CH 2 2.9(s, 311, -NCH 3 5.6(br, mn, IIH, 7.0(br, q, 411, aromatic), 7.3(br, s, 511, aromatic).

MS(FAB) m/z 392. Anal. H, N) C 26

H

36

N

2 0. HCI. 0.25 H120.

-62- Example 88 2-(3,4,5-Trimethoxyphenvl)-N-methyl-N-[(1S)-l-phenvl-2-(1pyrrolidinyl)ethyllacetamide; ADL-01-0146-9 ADL-01-0146-9 was prepared via the general EDCI/DIPEA coupling procedure from 28(250mg; 1.2mmol),3,4,5-Trimethoxyphenylacetic acid(304mg; 1.3mmol), HOBT(181mg; 1.3mmol), EDCI(256mg;1.3mmol), and DIPEA(318mL;1.8mmol). The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 5% MeOH:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 500mg(100%) of pure product which was treated with 1.OM HC1 in diethyl ether to give 48 as the HC1 salt. 1H NMR(free base, CDC13) 8 1.7(br, m, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.7(s, 3H, -NCH 3 3.8(d, 9H, -OCH 3 6.0-6.2(br, m, 1H, 6.4(s, 2H, aromatic), 7.1-7.3(complex, 5H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 412. Anal. (C,H,N)

C

24

H

32

N

2 0 4 .HC1.

Example 89 2-(2-Aminophenvl)-N-methyl-N-[(1S)-l-phenyl-2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)ethyllacetamide ADL-01-0024-8 20 Raney-Nickel(50% slurry in water) was added to a mixture of 31(2.30g;6.1mmol), 2.2mL(61.9mmol) of hydrazine hydrate and 45mL of abs. EtOH at 55 degrees to maintain a regular gas evolution. After 45 min., TLC(95:5 methylene chloride:methanol w/2% ammonia) indicated that all of the starting material was consumed. The mixture was filtered through a Celite plug and rinsed with copious amounts of hot methanol. The filtrates were 25 combined and concentrated in vacuo to afford 270 mg of a waxy solid. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 8% S methanol:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 2.01g(97%) of desired product.

The pure product was treated with 1.OM HC1 in diethyl ether to yield 49(ADL-01-0024-8) as the HCI salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, DMSO-d 6 8 2.0(br, m, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.1(br, m, 1H, 7.2(complex, 9H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 321. Anal. (C,H,N)

C

21

H

27

N

3 0. 2HC1. 0.75 H 2 0.

Example 2-(2-N,N-Dimethvlsulfonamido-2-aminophenvl)-N-methyl-N-(1 S)-l-phenyl-2-(1pyrrolidinyl)ethyllacetamide; ADL-01-0060-2 To a solution of 49(400 mg; 1.lmmol) in 50ml of dry methylene chloride was added 429mL of triethylamine and MsCl(913mL; 11.8mmol) dissolved in 6mL of dry methylene chloride.

The dark red solution was allowed to stir overnight. TLC(95:5 methylene chloride:methanol w/2% ammonia) indicates the starting material is consumed. The reaction solution was quenched with sat. sodium bicarbonate and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with methylene chloride and the combined organic layers were dried over anh.

sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent was concentrated in vacuo to give 700 mg of a dark brown residue. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 7% methanol:methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 580mg(97%) of desired product. The pure product was treated with 1.OM HCI in diethyl ether to yield 50(ADL-01-0060-2) as the HCI salt. 1 H NMR(HCI salt, DMSO-d 6 6 2.0(br, m, 4H, -63-

CH

2

CH

2 2.7(br, s, 3H, -NCH 3 3.5(br, s, (-SO 2

CH

3 2 6.2(br, d, 1H, 7.2- 9H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 493. Anal. C 23

H

3 lN 3 0 5

S

2 .HCI. 0.25

H

2 0.

Example 91 2 -(N-Methylsulfonamido-2-aminophenyl)-N-methyl-N-1(1S)-l-phenyl-2-(1 pvrrolidinvl~ethyll acetamide; ADL-01 -0075-0 To a solution of 50(500mg; 1.Ommol) in 6mL of 2:1 MeOH:THF was added 4.OmL of 1.0M NaGH. The solution was stirred for 20 min., after which TLC(95:5 methylene chloride:methanol w/2% ammonia) indicates the reaction is complete. The reaction was quenched with 10% HCl and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anh. sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 38 1mg of a brown solid. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 4% methanol: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to afford 326mg(80%) of desired product.

The pure product was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to yield 51(ADL-01-0075-0) as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, CDCl 3 8 2.0(br, mn, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, 3H, -NCJJ 3 3.0(s, 3H, -S0 2 CH1 3 6.3(br, mn, 1H, 7.0-7.2(complex, 8H, aromatic), 7.5(br, d, I-, MS (FAB) m/z 415. Anal. C 22 F1 29

N

3 0 3 S.HCl. 0.25 H 2 0.

Example 92 2-(2-Amino4,5-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-[I(S)-l-phenyl-2-(lpvrrolidinylbethylJ acetamide; ADL-01 -0035-4 To a solution of 32(495mg;1.Ommol) in 25mL of abs. EtOH was added 50mg of Pd/C. The mixture was placed on a Parr apparatus under IlOpsi of hydrogen. After Ilh, TLC(95:5 methylene chloride:methanol) indicates no starting material remains. The mixture was filtered through a Celite plug and basified with aq. ammonium hydroxide. The solvent was concentrated in vacuo to get a residue which was dissolved in EtOAc and washed 30 repeatedly with water. The organic layer was dried over anh. sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give 200mg of crude free base. The crude product was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether and dried in a vacuum oven @80 degrees overnight to recover 12Omg(30%)of o: 52(ADL-01-0035-4) as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HCI salt, CDCI 3 6 1.6-1 .7(br, mn, 4H,

CH

2

CH

2 2.7(s, 3H, -NCHA) 5.9-6. 1(br, mn, IlH, 7.1-7.2(complex, 711, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 406. Anal. C 2 lH 25

N

3 0C1 2 .HCl. 1.5 H 2 0.

Example 93 2 -(N,N-Dimethysulfonamido-2-amino-4,5-dichlorophenl)Nmethvl-N.t(1S)-l-pheny1-2- (1-pvrrolidinvl)ethvll acetamide; ADL-01 -0050-3 Same procedure as 50 using 223 mg(0.54mmol) of 52, 0.5mL(6.4mmol) of MsCI, 2.OmL(14.3mmol) of triethylamine and 25mL of dry methylene chloride. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 3% MeGH: methylene chloride to yield 1 S0mg(49%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 53(ADL-01-0050-3) as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(HC1 salt, CDCl 3 6 mn, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 A) 2.8(s, 3H, NCHA) 3.3(d, 6H, -(S0 2

CH

3 2 6.2(br, mn, 1H, -CH), 7.0-7. 1 (complex, 2H, aromatic), 7.3(complex, 5H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 562. Anal.

C

23 H4 29

N

3 0 5

S

2 C1 2 HCI. 0.5 H 2 0.

Example 94 2-2Aioac~-Tiloo4t )N-ehv--(S--phenyl-2-(1- Pvrrolidinvlbethvllacetamide; ADL-01-0068-5 Same procedure as 49using 7 l0mg(l.6mmol) of 37, 0.5mL(16.3mmol) of hydrazine hydrate in 5OmL of EtOH. The recovered product, 650mg(98% crude recovery) was not purified any further. A small amount of the desired product was treated with 1 .M HCI in diethyl ether to form 54(ADL-01-0068-5) as the HCI salt. 'H NMR(HCI salt, CDCI 3 6 mn, 4H1, -CH 2

CJJ

2 2.9(br, s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.3(br, mn, I1H, 7 2 7 .5(complex, 8H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 405. Anal.

C

22

H

26

N

3 0F 3 1.5 HCI.

Example 2 2 NNDimethlsulfonamido2amnoaaatrifluoro4tolVI-N-methyl-N-[(1S)-lphenvl-2-(l-pyrrolidinvl)ethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0069-3 Same procedure as 50 using lO0mg(0.24mmol) of 54, 0.2mL(2.4mmol) of MsCI, .8mL(6.3mmol) of triethylamine and l3mL of dry methylene chloride. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 5% MeGH: methylene chloride to yield I11 Omg(80%) of desired product. A small amount of compound was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 55(ADL-01-0069-3) as the HC1 salt. 'H salt, CDC1 3 6 2.0(br, mn, 41H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(s, 3H, -NCHA) 3.3(d, 6H, (S0 2

CH

3 2 6.3(br, mn, 11H, 7 .l- 8 .0(complex, 8H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 497. Anal.

N) C 24

H

3 0

N

3 0F 3

S

2 HCI. 0.5 H 2 0.

Example 96 30 2 -(N-Methylsulfonamido.2.aminoaaatrifluro4tolvl)-Nmethvl-NE[(lS)-l-phenyl-2- (1-pyrrolidinyl)ethyll acetamide; ADL-01-0077-6 Same procedure as 51 using 5lmg(0.lmmol) of 55, 3OmL of 1.OM NaOH and 1.9mL of 2:1 MeOH:THF. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 5% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to yield 27mg(63%) of pure product whi(ch was treated with, I (j 1-Wi toI- XIi-'Il U11-LHy1 eLIl~eI t POrMn 0ADL-01-uu /7-6) as the HCl salt. I'H NMR(HC1 salt, CDC1 3 8 2.0(br, mn, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(br, s, 3H,

NCH

3 3. 1(br, s, 3H, -50 2

CH

3 7 .1- 7 .3 (complex, 8H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 483. Anal.

C2 3

H

28

N

3 0 3

SF

3 .HC1. 0.25 H 2 0.

Example 97 2 2 -Aminophenyl)-N-methyl-N-(1 S)-l-phenyl-2-(1-Dyrrolidin-yl)ethvlacetamide; ADL-01-0089-1 Same procedure as 49 using 2.6g(7.lImmol) of 40, 2 .5mL(80.2m-ol) of hydrazine hydrate in 7OmL of EtOH. The recovered product, 1.8g was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1 to 9% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to yield

I

1.1 g(47%) of pure product which was treated with 1 OM HC1 in diethyl ether to give 57(ADL-01-0089-1) as the HCl salt. 'H1 NMR(frce base, CDCI 3 5 1.7-1.9(br, mn, 414,

CH

2

CH

2 2.7(s, 3H, -NCHA) 6.l1(br, mn, 114, 6 .5-6.8(complex, 3H, aromatic), 2H, aromatic), 7.3(complex, 4H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 337. Anal.

C

21 H1 27

N

3 0.

214C1. 0.5 H 2 0.

Example 98 2 -(4-Aminophenyl)-N-methyl-N-1(1S)-l-phenvl-2-(1 -pyrrolidinyliethvll acetamide; ADL-01-0103-0 Same procedure as 49 using 2 .3g(6.3mmol) of 39, 2.4mL(75.4mmol) of hydrazine hydrate in 7OmL of EtOH. The recovered product, 1 .7g was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 3% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to yield 1 .53g(73%) of pure product. A small amount of compound was treated with 1 OM UCI in diethyl ether to give 58(ADL-01-0103-0) as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(free base, CDC1 3 8 1 .8(br, mn, 4H4, -CH 2

CH

2 2.7(s, 3H, -NCHA) 6. 1(br, mn, I H, -CH) 6.7(m, 214, aromatic), 7.0(d, 2H, aromatic), 7.3(complex, 514, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 337. Anal. (C,14,N)

C

2 lH 27

N

3 0. 2HCl. 0.75 1420.

Example 99 2 -(NN-Dimethylsulfonamido2.aminopheny)NmethylNt(l S)-i-phenyl-2-(l- PyrrolidinylIethyll acetamide; ADL-01 -01 12-1 Same procedure as 50using 5O0mg(l.5mmol) of 57, 1.1mL(14.8mmol) of MsCl, 3 .OmL(22.2mmol) of triethylamine and 8.OmL of dry methylene chloride. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 1% to 4% MeOH: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to yield 308mg(42%) of pure product. A small amount 30 of compound was treated with 1 OM HCl in diethyl ether to give 59(ADL-01-0112-1) as the HCl salt. 'H NMR(free base, CDCl 3 8 1 .8(br, mn, 414, -CH 2

CH

2 2.8(s, 3H-, -NCH 3 3.4(s, 614 0 C 32 ,6 99,i H ,7 0 7 5 c m l x H a o ai) S( A m z4 3 Anal.

C

23 14 3

IN

3 0 5

S

2 HCl 2 -(NN-Dimethylsulfonamido..2.aminophen)N-methV-N (1 SI-1-phenyl-2-(lnvrrolidinyliethyllacetamide; ADL-01-0127-9 Same procedure as 50 using 400mg( 1.2mmol) of 58, 0.55mL(7.l1mmol) of MsCl, 1 .6mL(l 1 .8mmol) of triethylamine and l 2 .Oml of dry methylene chloride. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 5% MeO14: methylene chloride with 2% ammonia to yield 395mg(68%) of pure product. The compound was treated with 1 OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 60(ADL-01-0127-9) as the HCI salt.114 NMR(free base, CDCl 3 8 1 .8(br, mn, 414, -CI- 2

CH

2 2.8(s, 3H4, -NCHA) 3.4(s, 6H1, S0 2 C14 3 2 6.l1(br, mn, 114, 7

.O-

7 .5(complex, 914, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 493. Anal.

C

23 14 3 lN 3 0 5

S

2 .HC1. 0.25 1420.

-66- Example 101 2-(2-Hydroxyphenyl)-N-methyl-N-methyl-N-[(1S)-l-phenyl-2-(1pyrrolidinyl)ethyl]acetamide; ADL-01-0061-0 To a solution of 34(700mg;1.8mmol) in O1mL of dry methylene chloride -78 degrees was added 10.8mL(10.8mmol;1.0M solution of BBr 3 in methylene chloride) over 15 minutes.

The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. TLC(95:5 methylene chloride: MeOH w/2% ammonia) indicated no starting material remained. The reactionn was quenched with the addition of MeOH at 0 degrees. After 30 minutes, 3N HC1 was added and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes(white precipitate seen). The mixture was made neutral with sat. bicarbonate and extracted with methylene chloride(3xlOOMmL).

The organic layer was dried over anh. sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 610mg of crude product. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a stepwise gradient of 2% to 3% MeOH: methylene chloride to yield 500mg(82%) of pure product. The product was treated with 1.OM HCI in diethyl ether to give 61(ADL-01-0061-0) as the HCI salt. 'H NMR(free base, CDC 3 81.7(br, m, 4H, -CH 2

CH

2 2.9(s, 3H, -NCH 3 6.1(br, m, 1H, 6 .8-7.4(complex, 9H, aromatic). MS (FAB) m/z 338. Anal. (C,H,N)

C

21

H

26

N

2 0 2 .HC1. 0.5 H 2 0.

Example 102 •25 N-Methyl-N-[(1S)-l-phenyl-2-((3S)-3-hydroxvpyrrolidine-l-vl)ethyll-3,4,5trimethoxyphenylacetamide HCI (A) ADL-01-140-2 30 To a solution of 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylaetic acid (1.0 g, 4.43 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 C12 under a nitrogen atmosphere was added pyridine (0.12 g, 1.5 mmol) and N,N- S* diisopropylethylamine (Hunig's Base) (0.57 g, 4.43 mmol). The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 0 C and DCC (1.37 g, 6.65 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirrred at this temperature and a solution of the diaminel (0.65 g, 3.0 mmol) in 10mL of

CH

2 C1 2 was added and the stirring was continued while warming to room temperature for h. The reaction mixture was poured onto an aqueous saturated solutoin of NaHCO 3 and the mixture was stirred for 30 min. The organic layer was separated and dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 After removal of the solvent, the product was purifed on a silica gel column [solvent system: CHC1 3

CH

3 0H:28%NH 4 0H(98:2:2)]. The free base was converted to the hydrochloride salt from lM etherial HCI and recrystallized form CH 2 C12:Et20 to give a HCI 0.64 g as light pink solid; mp 230-232 0 C; 'H-NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 5 2.20 (m, 4H), 2.85 3H), 3.00-4.30 5H), 3.70 (ms, 9H), 4.50 2H), 5.30 J 15.0 Hz,1H), 6.50 3H), 7.28 5H). Anal. Calcd for C 24

H

32

N

2 0 5 .HC1.0.25H 2 0: C, 61.40; H, 7.19; N, 5.97. Found: C, 61.36; H, 6.84; 8.96; N, 5.91.

The structure of the compound is shown hereunder.

-67- N 3

HCI

CH

3 Compounds of formula IV Intermediates The following intermediates were prepared.

Synthesis of Diamine 3 9.

O0

N

H

A

1. CH 3

SO

2 CI/Et 3

N

2.CH 3

NH

2 (2M THF) sealed tube 70-80 0

C

H

3

C

S ,NH

N

31 i (±)-trans- 2 -Pyrrolidinyl-N-methylcyclohexylamine (3) The racemic diamine was prepared by a number of procedure reported in the literature.' 0 20 Alternatively, the amine was also prepared from cyclohexene oxide following the S• procedure described in Scheme I and the literature 1 2 in 70% overall yield as brown oil. A sample was purified by the distillation 75-82 0 C/ 1.0 mm, lit.

2 b.p. 76-80 0 C/1.2 mm); 'H- NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 8 1.04-1.36 4H), 1.49-1.89 8H), 2.18 J 5.0 Hz,1H), 2.52 3H), 2.56-2.70 4H), 2.80-2.93 1H), 7.75 (bs, 1H). The corresponding chiral amine could be prepared following the literature procedures.

Ref.

Szmuszkovicz, Von Voigtlander, P. F. J. Med. Chem. 1982, 25, 1125-1126.

(11) DeCosata, George, Rothman, R. Jacobson, A. Rice, K. E. FEBBS Lett. 1987, 223, 335-339.

(12) Freeman, J. Michalson, E. D'Andrea, S. Baczynskyj, Von Voigtlander, P. Lahti, R. A.; Smith, M. Lawson, C. Scahill, T. Mizsak, Szmuszkovicz, J. J. Med. Chem. 1991, 34, 1891- 1896.

Synthesis of Arylacetamides

H

3 C H3C 1. DCC/RCO 2

H

NH 2. Pyridine/CH 2 C12 ,,NCOR or I N 1. HOBT/RCO 2 H

N

2. EDCI/Hunig's Base 3 General procedure for the preparation of aryl acetamides 5 HCI To a stirred solution of aryl acetic acid (1.5 mmol) in 20 mL of dry CH 2

C

2 was added pyridine (0.5 mmol) at 0-5 C under a nitrogen atmosphere. N,N'-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (2.0 mmol) was added in one portion and the reaction mixture was continued stirring for 30 min while warming to room temperature. A solution of the 3 (1.0 mml) in 10 mL of dry CH 2

C

2 was added and the progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC in solvent system corresponds to CHCl 3

:CH

3 0H:28% NH 4 0H 93:5:2). After disappearance of the diamine 3, the reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NaHCO3 and stirring was continued for addition 15 min. The precipitated N,N'-dicyclohexylurea (DCU) was removed by filtration and the filter cake was washed with additional amounts of CH 2 C1 2 The combined filtrate was evaporated to dryness and the residue was purified either on a silica gel column or using Chroatotran silica gel plattes form the from the solvent system mentioned for 20 each compound to give 5 as free base. The hydrochloride salts were prepared from dissolving 5 in minimum amount of CH 2 C2 and addition of 2.0 equivalents of 1M etherial HC1. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the HCI salts were recystallized from the solvents indicated below. The yields given below are for overall steps.

Example 103 (±)-trans-2-Nitro-N-methyl-N-[2-(1-pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexvllphenvlacetamide Hydrochloride 5a HC1 ADL-01-0012-3 Prepared from 2-nitrophenylacetic acid [solvent for purification- CH 2 Cl 2

:CH

3 0H: 28%NH 4 0H yield 21% as a white solid (2-prppanol); mp 267-269 0 C 'H NMR((200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.00-1.44 2H), 1.60-2.35 8H), 2.85 1H), 3.15 3H), 3.18-3.35 4H), 3.40 1H), 3.85 1H), 4.33 (dd, J =10.0 Hz, 2H), 4.64 1H), 7.35 1H), 7.56 2H), 8.05 J 7.8 Hz, 1H), 11.02 (bs, 1H). Anal. Calcd for C1 9

H

27

N

3 0 3 .HCl: C, 59.75; H, 7.39; Cl, 9.28; N, 11.00. Found: C, 59.98; H, 7.38; 8.96; N, 10.85.

Example 104 (±)-trans-2-Amino-N-methyl-N-2-(1-pyrrolidinvl)cyclohexvllphenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5b HC1 ADL-01-0014-9 To a solution 5a HCI (0.5 g, 1.31 nmol) in 30 mL of CH 3 0H was added 10% Pd/C -69- (100 mg) and hydrogenated at 50 PSI in a Parr Apparatus at ambient temperature for 3 h. The catalyst was removed by filtration through a celite pad and washed with hot CH 3 OH and the combined filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was recrystallized from 2-propanol to give 5b HCI as a white solid, 0.45 g mp 213-215 0 C; 'H NMR(200 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.05-1.40 2H), 1.65-2.25 8H), 3.10 3H), 2.90-3.25 4H), 3.50 J 12.0, 1H), 3.65 1H), 3.88 1H), 4.20 J =12.5 Hz, 1H), 4.70 1H), 6.65 2H), 7.00 2H), 7.25 (bs, 2H). Anal. Calcd for C 19

H

29

N

3 0.HC1.0.5H 2 0: C, 63.23; H, 8.66; N, 11.64. Found: C, 63.59; H, 8.76; N, 11.61.

Example 105 (±)-trans-2-Nitro-4.5-dichloro-N-methvl-N- 2-(1 -pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexyllphenvlacetamide Hydrochloride 5c HC11 ADL-01-0015-6 The compound was prepared according to the literature method (DeCosata, Linda, B.; Rothman, R. Jacobson, A. Bykov, Pert, Rice, K. E. FEBBS Lett. 1989, 249, 178-182); 'H NMR(200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.15-1.45 2H), 1.55-2.30 8H), 3.10 3H), 2.85-3.20 4H), 3.40 1H), 3.88 1H), 4.25 J =14.5 Hz, 1H), 4.45 J 15.0 Hz, 1H), 4.65 1H), 7.70 1H), 8.13 1H). Anal. Calcd for Ci 9

H

25 C1 2

N

3 0 3 .HCl: C, 2 50.62; H, 5.81; N, 9.32. Found: C, 50.61; H, 5.61; N, 9.20.

Example 106 (±)-trans-2-Amino-4,5-dichloro-N-methyl-N- 2-(1-pyrrolidinl)cyclohexyl phenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5d HCII ADL-01-0016-4 25 Obtained from 5c HCI following the literature procedure (DeCosata, Linda, B.; S* Rothman, R. Jacobson, A. Bykov, Pert, Rice, K. E. FEBBS Lett. 1989, 249, 178-182); 'H NMR(200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.10-1.40 4H), 1.48-2.20 8H), 3.00 3H), S 3.10-3.30 4H), 3.55 J 14.0 Hz, 1H), 3.85 J 14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.50 1H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 7.08 1H). Anal. Calcd for C1 9

H

27 C1 2

N

3 0.HC10.75H 2 0: C, 52.54; H, 6.84; N, 9.67.

Found: C, 52.561; H, 6.63; N, 9.33.

S: Example 107 (±)-trans-2-Methanesulfonamido-N-methyl-N-[2-(1-pyrrolidinvl)cvyclohexvylphenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5e HC1 ADL-01-0025-5 To a solution of free base of 5b (1.0 g, 3.2 mmol) in 40 mL of dry CH 2 C12 at 0°C under a nitrogen atmosphere was added Et 3 N (1.86 g, 18.4 mmol). A solution of methanesulfonyl chloride (1.14 g, 9.92 mmol) in 15 mL of dry CH 2 C1 2 was added dropwise within 15 min.

After 2 h at room temperature TLC [solvent system: CHC1 3

:CH

3 0H:28% NH 4 0H 93:5:2)] showed still staring material was present. Additional amounts of Et 3 N(1.86 g) and methanesulfonyl chloride (1.14 g) were added and stirring was continued for another 2 h by this time no starting material was present in the reaction mixture. After the mixture was diluted with 40 mL CH 2 C1 2 of, it was washed with saturated NaHCO 3 water, saturated salt solution, and dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 Removal of solvent under reduced pressure gave the bis-sulfoamide as a brown foam which was used directly in the following hydrolysis.

To a solution of bis-sulfonamide (1.0 g, 2.12 mmol) in 60 mL of CH30H:THF was added 10 M aqueous NaOH (0.96 mL, 9.6 mmol).

13 The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min and then acidified with IN HC1. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was redissolved in CH 2 C1 2 The CH 2 C2 layer was then washed with 5% NaHCO 3 saturated salt solution, and dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 Removal of solvent under reduced pressure chromatography on a silica gel column [solvent system: CH 2 C1 2 CH30H: 28% NH 4 0H gave the mono-sulfonamide (free base) as an oil; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.05-1.95 12H), 2.45-2.80 2.95 3H), 3.10 3H), 3,50 J 13.8 Hz, 1H), 3.65 1H), 3.85 J= 14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.45 1H), 7.05 1H), 7.15 2H), 7.45 J 8.5 Hz, 1H). The hydrochloride salt was prepared by dissolving the free base in CH 2 C12 and adding 1.2 equivalents of 1M etherial HCI and recrystallizing from 2-propanol to give 5e HCI as beige colored solid, 0.37 g mp 229-231 0 C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCI 3 6 1.10-2.20 12H), 2.90-3.20 4H), 3.00 (s, 3H), 3.15 3H), 3.50 1H), 3.65 J 13.5 Hz, 2H), 3.80 1H), 4.40 1H), 7.05- 7.30 3H), 7.60 J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.90 (bs, 1H). Anal. Calcd for C2oH 3 1N 3 0 3 S.HC1.0.25H 2 0: C, 55.28; H, 7.54; N, 9.67. Found: C, 55.40; H, 7.39; N, 9.49.

Ref.

20 (13) Li, Black, W. Chan, Ford-Huctchinson, A. Gauthier, Gordon, Guay, D; Kargman, Lau, C. Mancini, Ouimet, Roy, Vickers, Wong. Young, R. Zamboni, R.; Prasit, P. J. Med. Chem. 1995, 38, 4897-4905.

Example 108 25 N-[2-(±)-trans-N-Methyl-N-[ 2 -(1-pyrrolidinyl)cvclohexyll-phenylacetamidolglycine Hydrochloride 5f HC11 S* ADL-01-0028-9 To a stirred solution of 5b (free base, 1.0 g, 3.2 mmol) in 15 mL of dry DMF at room 30 temperature under a nitrogen atmosphere was added 95% NaH (0.083 g, 3.3 mmol). After stirring at room temperature for 30 min, the turbid solution was added to a stirred solution of tert-butyl bromoacetate (0.66 g, 3.4 mmol) in 10 mL of dry DMF. The reaction mixture was continued stirring for 72 h however TLC of the reaction mixture [solvent system: CHC1 3

:CH

3 0H:28% NH40H 93:5:2)] showed still starting material was present. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was partioned between

CH

2 Cl 2 /water. The product was purified on a silica gel column from CH 2 Cl 2

:CH

3 0H (9:1) and was recystallized from CH2C1 2 :Et20 to give the corresponding tert-butyl ester, 0.16 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.05-1.35 4H), 1.35 9H), 1.55-2.20 8H), 2.92 4H), 3.12 3H), 3.45 1H), 3.60 J 14.0 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (bt, 2H), 3.95 (m, 1H), 5.75 1H),6.38 J 6.5 Hz, 1H), 6.60 J 5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.00 2H). The staring material was also recovered in 50% yield.

The tert-butyl ester (0.16 g, 0.372 mmol) was suspended in 10 mL of 4N aqueous HCI and added one drop of anisole and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was redissolved in CH 3

CN

and filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was recrystallized from 2-propanol:ether to give 5f HCI as a white solid, 0.070 g -71mp 212-214°C 'H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d 6 8 1.15-2.25 12H), 2.90 1H), 3.05 3H), 3.14-3.70 6H), 3.85 (bs, 2H), 4.55 1H), 6.37 J 6.0 Hz, 1H), 6.55 J Hz, 1H), 6.95 2H), 9.80 1H). Anal. Calcd for C 21

H

3

N

3 0 3

.HCI.H

2 0: C, 58.93; H, 8.00; N, 9.81. Found: C, 58.79; H, 7.64; N, 9.43.

Example 109 (±)-trans- 4 -Trifluoromethyl-N-methvl-N- 2-(l-pyrrolidinvl)cvclohexvll-phenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5g HCII ADL-01-0066-9 To a solution of 4 -trifluoromethylphenyl acetic acid (1.45 g, 7.08 mmol) in 10 mL of dry

CH

2 C1 2 under a nitrogen atmosphere was added 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (HOBT) (0.95 g, 7.08 mmol) and stirred. The reaction mixture was cooled to 5oC and added solid EDCI 3 -dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl-carbodiimide HC1])(1.35 g, 7.08 mmol) and stirrat this temperature for 30 min. A solution 3 (1.0 g, 5.48 mmol) in 10 mL of dry

CH

2 C1 2 was added followed by N,N-diisopropylethylamine (Hunig's Base) (0.915 g, 7.08 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 h while warming to the room temperature.

The reaction mixture was then poured on to excess of ice-cold saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution and stirred for 30 min. After dilution with CH 2

C

2 the organic was separated washed with saturated salt solution and dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 Removal of solvent gave a brown oil which was chromatogrphed on a silica gel column [solvent system: CH 2 C1 2

CH

3 0H: 28% NH 4 0H to give the desired product as free base. The hydrochloride salt was prepared from 1M etherial HCI and recrystallized from CH 2

C

2 Et 2 0 to give 25 5g HCI as a cream colored solid, 0.68 g 213-215C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC1 3 5 1.02-1.47 4H), 1.52-2.22 8H), 2.75-2.90 2H), 2.94 3H), 3.07 1H), 3.37 1H), 3.62 J 15.0 Hz, 1H), 3.77 1H), 4.17 J 15.0 Hz, 1H), 4.57 1H), 7.30 J 8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.38 J 8.0 Hz, 2H). Anal. Calcd for

C

20

H

27

F

3

N

2 0.HC1.0.25H 2 0: C, 58.68; H, 7.02; N, 6.84. Found: C, 58.68; H, 6.84; N, 6.69.

Nitration of 4 -trifluorometylphenyl acetic acid General procedure:

NO

2 \Fuming HS04-

F

3 C CH 2

CO

2 H 90% HN03 F3C CH 2

CO

2

H

Preparation of 2 -nitro-4-trifluoromethylphenyl acetic acid R 2-NO 2 (4-CF)

C

6

H

4 CH,2 To a solution of 4 -trifluoromethylphenyl acetic acid (2.5 g, 12.25 mmol) in 8 mL of glacial acetic acid at 0 C under an anhydrous atmosphere was added 5 mL of fuming H 2 S0 4 (11%

SO

3 (caution followed by cautious addition of 90% HN0 3 (3.5 mL, 73.14 mmol) within min. The reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 2 h and poured into ice- -72water. The resulting solid was filtered and washed with cold deionized water to give the desired product after drying as off-white solid, 2.5 g 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 6 4.02 2H), 7.41 J 8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.74 J 8.0 Hz, 2H), 8.28 1H). The product was used directly into the following reactions.

Example 110 (±)-trans- 2 -Nitro-4-trifluoromethyl-N-methyl-N-f2-(1-pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexvlphenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5h HCIJ ADL-01-0065-1 Prepared from 2 -nitro- 4 -trifluoromethylphenyl acetic acid following the procedure described in Example II to give 5h HCI as cream colored solid in 56% yield; mp 259-261 0 C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.10-1.42 4H), 1.51-2.25 8H), 2.95-3.25 3H), 3.14 (s, 3H), 3.40 1H), 3.90 1H), 4.35 J 13.8 Hz, 1H), 4.55 J 14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.60 1H), 7.80 (dd, J 7.8 Hz, 2H), 8.25 1H). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

26

F

3

N

3 0 3 .HC1.0.25H 2 0: C, 52.86; H, 6.10; N, 9.25. Found: C, 52.85; H, 6.02; N, 9.13.

Example 111 (±)-trans- 2 -Amino-4-trifluoromethyl-N-methyl-N-[2-(1-pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexyllphenvlacetamide Hydrochloride 5i HC11 ADL-01-0080-0 To a solution of free base 4h (0.4 g, 0.97 mmol) in 20 mL of absolute alcohol was added 2 ml *2 of hydrazine hydrate and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50oC under a nitrogen 25 atmosphere. Raney nickel (50% slurry in water) was added slowly and the progress of the reaction was monitored on TLC plate [solvent system: CHC1 3 CH30H: 28% NH 4 0H If needed more of the Raney®nickel was added to the reaction mixture. When reaction was completed, excess of Raney®nickel was introduced to decompose the hydrazine hydrate. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite pad and the pad was washed with hot CH30H. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified on a silica gel column [solvent system: CHCI 3 CH30H: 28% NH 4 0H and the hydrochloride salt was prepared from 1M etherial HC1. Recrystallization from CH 2 C12:Et 2 0 gave HCI as a white solid, 0.2 g mp 248-250 0 C 'H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d 6 6 1.15 -2.18 12H), 3.00 3H), 3.15-4.10 7H), 4.50 1H), 6.80(d, J 7.8 Hz, 1H), 6.92 1H), 7.10 J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 10.0 (bs, 1H). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

28

F

3

N

3 0.HC1.0.5H 2 0: C, 56.01; H, 7.05; N, 9.80. Found: C, 55.70; H, 7.03; N, 9.65.

Example 112 (±)-trans- 2 -Bismethanesulfonamido-4-trifluoromethyl-N-methyl-N- 2-(1pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexyll-phenylacetamide Hvdrochloride 5i HC11 ADL-01-0118-8 The compound was prepared from free base 5i (0.5 g, 1.30 mmol) following the procedure described in the first part of the preparation of 5e. The bismethaneslfonamide was purified on a silica gel column [solvent system: CH 2 C1 2 CH30H: 28% NH 4 0H (96:2:2)] to give the desired product as a foam. The hydrochloride salt was prepared from 1M etheial -73- HCI and recrystallized from 2 -propanol:Et20 to give 5j HCI as a beige colored solid, 0.23 g mp 224-226 0 C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.12-1.51 4H), 1.53-2.24 8H), 1.82-3.17 2H), 2.98 3H), 3.32-3.56 2H), 3.28 3H), 3.33 (s, 3H), 3.77 1H), 3.97 J 14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.27 J 14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.62 1H), 7.39 (s, 1H), 7.55 J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.85 J 8.0 Hz, 1H). Anal. Calcd for C22H 32

F

3

N

3 0 5

S

2 .HCl: C, 45.87; H, 5.77; N, 7.29. Found: C, 45.53; H, 5.81; N, 7.00.

Example 113 (±)-trans- 2 -Methanesulfonamido-4-trifluoromethyl-N-methl-N-[2-(1pyrrolidinvl)cvclohexyll-phenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5k HC11 ADL-01-0137-8 To a solution of 5j HCI (0.16 g, 0.23 mmol) in 9 mL of CH30H:THF at room temperature was added 0.12 mL of 10M aqueous NaOH and the mixture was stirred for min. The reaction mixture was neutralized with IN HCI and evaporated to dryness. The residue was redissolved in CH 2 C2 and basified with saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO 3 The organic layer was separated, washed with water, saturated salt solution, and dried over anhydrous Na 2

SO

4 Removal of solvent under reduced pressure gave the product as a free 2 base. The hydrochloride salt was prepared from 1M etherial HCI and recrystallized from

CH

2

C

2 Et 2 0 to give 5k HCI as a beige colored solid, 0.085 g 209-211°C H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.15-1.24 4H), 1.50-2.10 8H), 2.20 2H), 2.90-3.10 2H), 3.05 6H), 3.55 2H), 3.80 1H), 4.64 1H), 7.20 (dd, J 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.88 1H), 9.00 1H). Anal. Calcd for C 21

H

30

F

3

N

3 0 3 S.HC1.0.125 H20: C, 50.42; H, 6.30; N, 8.40. Found: C, 50.62; H, 6.49; N, 8.00.

Example 114 N-[2-(±)-trans-4-Trifluoromethyl-N-methyl-N- 2-(1 -yrrolidinyl)cyclohexvllphenylacetamidolglycine Hydrochloride 51 HCII ADL-01-0130-3 To a solution of free base 5i (0.767, 2.0 mmol) in 10 mL of anhydrous THF under a nitrogen atmosphere at 0 C was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (Hunig's Base) (1.55 g, 12.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at OoC for 15 min then added bromoacetic acid t-butyl ester (1.95 g, 10.0 mmol) and the reaction mixture was continued to stir while warming to room temperature 72 h. The solvent was evaporated at reduced pressure and the residue was partitio1ed betwn CH l212 and water. The organic layer was then washed with, saturated NaHCO 3 saturated salt solution, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO 4 .Removal of solvent gave the crude product which was purified on a silica gel column [solvent system: CHC1 3

CH

3 0H: 28% NH 4 0H to give the intermediate t-butyl ester 0.477 g 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC1 3 6 1.05-1.25 4H), 1.38-1.90 8H), 1.40 9H), 2.15-2.75 5H), 2.85 3H), 3.60 2H), 3.75 J 4.0 Hz, 2H), 4.45 1H), 5.85 1H), 6.55 1H), 6.80 J 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.10 J 7.8 Hz, 1H).

The above t-butyl ester (0.47 g, 0.77 mmol) was suspended in 10 mL of aqueous 4N HCI and added 2-3 drops of anisole. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 h and filtered. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness, redissolved in CH 3 CN, filtered again, and -74concentrated. Addition of the ether gave the product which was filtered, washed with ether, and dried to give 51 HCI as a beige colored solid, 0. 17 g (41 mp 178-180TC MS (FAB) 442 'H4 NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.05-2.20 (in, 1214), 2.75 3H), 2.90-3.25 (in, 5H), 3.30-3.55 (mn, 214), 3 7 0-4.35(mn, 4H), 4.65 (in, lH), 6.72 114), 6.80 (in, 114), 6.95 J 7.7 Hz, 114). Anal. Calcd for C 22

H

3 0

F

3

N

3 3 .HCl.0.l25Et 2 O: C, 55.47; H, 6.67; N, 8.62. Found: C, 55.64; H, 7.06; N, 9.00.

Example 115 (±)-trans-3-Trifluoromethl.N-.methyl-N-[ 2 -(l-pyrrolidinyl~cyclohexyl..phenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5m HCI1 ADL-01-0083-4 Following the Example 11, 5m HCI was prepared from 3-trifluoromethyiphenyl acetic acid in 67% yield as a cream colored solid; mp 245-247'C; 114 NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.15-1.55 (in, 414), 1.60-2.30 (in, 814), 2.80-3.05 (in, 214), 3.00 314), 3.18 (in, lH), 3.45 (in, 114), 3.75 J 15.0 Hz, 114), 3.85 (in, 114), 4.25 J 14.8 Hz, 114), 4.65 (in, 114), 7.40 (in, 414). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

27

F

3

N

2 .HCl.0.2514 2 0: C, 58.68; H, 7.02; N, 6.84. Found: C, 58.46; H, 7.17; N, 6.69.

Nitration of 3-trifluorometvlnhenvi acetic acid: OS@s

S

S*

*5S* S S SS S p 6*S S S p 8t 8

F

3

C

CH2,CO 2

H

Fuming H2SO 4 90% HN0 3 .N0 2

CH

2

CO

2

H

:.be :25 be 0.: 0 2

N

Prepartioni of 2 -nitro-3-trifluoromethvlpheny! aetic' 2aid rd R? Cq 6

H

4

CH

2 I and preparation of -nitro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl acetic acid R N02(3-CE 3

-C

6 IbCH The nitration of 3-trifluorophenylacetic acid as shown earlier resulted into a 1: 1 non-separable mixture of 2- and 5-nitro compounds in 66% yield. The structural assignment of the compounds were made on the basis of 114 NMR spectrum. The mixture was used in the condensation reaction.

Example 116 (±)-trans- 5 -Nitro-3-trifluoromethy-N-methylN[2(..pyrrolidinl)cyclohexyll- Phenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5n HC1 and (±)-trans-2-Nitro-3-trifluoromethyl-N methyl-N-[2-(l-pyrroidinyl)cvclohexyl..phenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5o HCJJ.

ADL-01-008 7-5 and ADL-01-0088-3 The compounds were prepared as shown in Example 109 and the mixture of 2- and nitrophenylacetic acids to give the mixture of products. Initially the compounds were separated on a silica gel column [solvent system: CHC1 3

CH

3 OH: 28% NH 4 0HJ (96:2:2)] which resulted in the free base of the compounds as pure mixture. The products were again purified on Chromatotran using a 4 mm silica gel plate [solvent system: CHC1 3 containing 2%

NH

4 OH]. The first product was isolated and converted to the hydrochloride salt and the salt was recrystallized from 2-propanol: ether 1) to give 5n HCl as a cream colored solid in yield; mp 236-238'C; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 5 1.15-1.55 (in, 4H), 1.65-2.30 (in, 8H), 2.85-3.20 (in, 3H), 3.10 3H), 3.40 (in, lH), 3.70 J =14.0 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (in, IH), 4.60 (brd, 2H), 7.90 1H), 8.25 lH), 8.32 1H). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

26

F

3

N

3 0 3 .HCJ: C, 53.39; H, 6.05; N, 9.34. Found: C, 53.28; H, 6.06; N, 9.36.

**The second product, 5o HCI, was also isolated in 10% yield after the recrystallization of the hydrochloride salt from 2-propanol: ether as a white solid; mp 243-245 0 C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.10-1.50 (in, 4H), 1.55-2.20 (in, 8H), 2.90-3.20 (in, 3H), 3. 10 (s, 3H), 3.44 (in, lH), 3.65 J 13.5 Hz, IH), 3.90 (in, lH), 4.65 (brd, 2H), 7.70 7.82 2H). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

26

F

3

N

3

O

3

.HCI.H

2 0: C, 51.34; H, 6.25; N, 8.98. Found: C, 51.69; H, 6.24; N, 8.89.

Example 117 Hydrochloride 5P HC1 30 ADL-01-0114-7 The compound was prepared from 2-trfluoromethylphenylacetic acid following the Example II. The hydrochloride salt was made from 1IM etherial HCI and recrystallized from 2propanol:ether 1) to give 5p HCI in 20% yield as a white solid; mp 282-284'C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.20-1.50 (in, 4H), 1.55-2.30 (in, 8H), 3.85-3.04 (in, 2H), 3.08 (s, Jin), 1. 1 n, 1H)i, 3J.40--36 (in, I 3.90 (in, d, J 14.5 Hz, 2H), 4.26 J =14.7 Hz, lH), 4.63 (in, 1H), 7.26 J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.45 J =8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.60 J 7.5 Hz, 2H).

Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

27

F

3

N

2 0.HCl: C, 59.33; H, 6.97; N, 6.92. Found: C, 59.28; H, 6.73; N, 6.84.

Nitration of 2-trifluorometylphenyl acetic acid:

CF

3

CF

3 Fuming H,)SO 4

UH

2

CO

2 H 90% H-N0 3 0 2 N CH 2

CO

2

H

-76- Preparation of 4 -nitro-2-trifluoromethvlphenyl acetic acid R =4-NO 2 (2-CF 3 L The nitration of 2 -trifluorophenylacetic acid as depicted in Scheme III gave mostly the corresponding 4-nitro derivative and only a trace amount of 6-nitro compound was detected in the proton NMR; 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCJ 3 8 3.90 2H), 7.55 J 8.4 Hz, 1H-), 8.35 (dd, J 2.4, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.50 J 2.4 Hz, 11H). The compound was used directly into the following coupling reaction.

Example 118 (±)-trans- 4 -Nitro- 2 -trifluoromethylNmethylNI2{1.Pyrrolidiny)cyclohexyllphenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5o UCli ADL-01-0116-2 The compound was prepared following the coupling method described in Example 109 from 4 -nitro-2-trfluorophenylacetic acid. The hydrochloride salt was prepared by known method and recrystallized from 2-propanol: ether to give 5q HC1 as a beige colored solid in yield; mp 265-267 0 C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 8 1.15-1.45 (in, 4H), 1.50-2.30 (in, 8H), 2.85-3.20 (in, 3H), 3.05 3H), 3.45 (in, 3.90 (in, d, J 14.0 Hz, 2H), 4.60 (brd, 2H), 8.00 J 8.0 Hz, 8.25 (dd, J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.40 J 2.4 Hz, 11H).

Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

26

F

3

N

3 0 3 .HCl C, 53.39; H, 6.05; N, 9.34. Found: C, 53.29; H, 5.93; N, 9.17.

Example 119 (±)-trans- 4 -Amino-2-trifluoromethyl..N.methyl-N

I

2 -(l-pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexylahenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5r 2HC1 9. ADL.-01-0142-8 30 The compound was prepared from free base 5q following the reduction procedure described for the preparation of 5h. The free base was converted to di-hydrochloride from I iM etherial HCl and recrystallized from CH 2 Cl 2

:CH

3 OH:Et 2 O 1) to give 5r 2HCI as a white solid in 68% yield; mp 288-290'C 'HNMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d 6 6 1.10-2.20 (in, 12H), 2.98 3H), 3.00-3.30 (in, 4H), 3.50 (in, 1H), 3.80 J 14.5 Hz, 4.20 J 14.8 Hz, 4.50 (in, 7.50 (in, 3H). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

28

F

3

N

3 0.2HCI C, 52.64; Iii, 0o.03; IN, 9.21. Found: C,52.67; H, 6.52; N, 9.06.

Example 120 (±)-trans-N-Methyl-N-

I

2 -(l-pvrrolidinyl)cyclohexyl2,2-.dphenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5s HCJ ADL-01-0013-1 The compound was prepared from diphenylacetic acid following the general procedure for the preparation of aryl acetamides. The hydrochloride salt was recrystallized from 2-propanol to give 5s HC1 as a white solid in 20% yield; mp 295-297'C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl 3 5 1,20-2.40 (in, 12H), 2.85-3.15 (in, 2H), 3.00 3H), 3.25-3.60 (in, 2H), 3.95 (in, -77- 1H), 4.75 1H), 5.70 1H), 7.35 10H). Anal. Calcd for C 25

H

32

N

2 0.HC1.0.25H 2 0 C, 71.92; H, 8.09; N, 6.71. Found: C, 72.25; H, 8.40; N, 6.52.

Example 121 (±)-trans- 4 -Methvlsulfonvl-N-methyl-N- 2-(1-pyrrolidinyl)cyclohexyllphenylacetamide Hydrochloride 5t HCII ADL-01-0071-9 The compound was prepared from 4-methylsulfonylphenylacetic acid to the method of Example 109 and the hydrochloride salt was recrystallized from CH 2 Cl 2

:ET

2 0 to give 5t HCI as a cream colored solid in 50% yield; mp 152-154 0 C 'H NMR (200 MHz, CDC13) 6 1.10-2.30 12H), 2.95 6H), 3.00-3.25 2H), 3.40 1H), 3.65 J 14.5 Hz, 1H), 3.85 1H), 4.35 J 14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.67 1H), 7.45 J 8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.80 J 8.0 Hz, 2H). Anal. Calcd for C 20

H

30

N

2 0 3 S.HC.l.5H 2 0 C, 54.35; H, 7.75; N, 6.34.

Found: C, 54.20; H, 7.38; N, 6.15.

In a composition aspect, the kappa agonist compounds of the present invention are formulated into parenteral, local and topical formulations.

The compositions are formulated as injectables, as oral and rectal formulations for 20 systemic administration, and for local and topical administration as creams, aqueous or nonaqueous suspension, lotions, emulsions, suspensions or emulsions containing micronized particles, gels, foams aerosols, solids and other suitable vehicles for application to the skin, o 4 eyes, lips and mucosa, as suppositories or cream for vaginal administration, and as combinations with bandages, patches, bioadhesives and dressings. The compounds may be formulated in combination with other agents, such as local anesthetics and other therapeutic S° agents. The other agents may be mixed in the compositions are provided and administered Sprior to, simultaneously with or subsequent to administration of the compositions provided for the methods herein. Such agents include, but are not limited to: antibiotics, including 3 cephalosporins, B-lactams, tetracyclines, vancomycins, sulfas and aminoglycosides; antivirals, S 30 including acylovir; and antifungals including clotrimazole.

In a method aspect the present invention provides method to treat hyperalgesia by applying an amount of a compound or composition to a mammal to ameliorate or eliminate pain. Thus, the method of the present invention comprises a method of treating pain internally or externally present in the mammalian body including: internal injuries, such as caused by accident or surgical procedures; abnormal functioning of body organs; irritation associated with inflammation following local infection, blisters, boils, or acute skin injuries, such as abrasions, burns, superficial cuts, surgical incisions, toothaches, contusions, irritations, inflammatory skin conditions, including but not limited to poison ivy, and allergic rashes and dermatitis and any condition that yields a hyperalgesic pain state and other such conditions.

-78- Assessment of Anti-hyperalgesic Activity The pharmacological activity of the compounds of the present invention may be assessed by several art-recognized in vitro and in vivo models. Some of the typical models are described herein.

In vitro binding assay (Primary Screen) 14 The initial test of these compounds is 3 H]diprenorphine binding to the cloned human kappa receptor. The compounds that inhibit binding by at least 80% at 1 pM are titrated and Ki values are determined by Cheng-Prusoff transformations of IC 50 values. The IC 50 value is the concentration of inhibitor that inhibits binding of radiolabel by 50% and the K i value is the affinity of the inhibitor for the receptor. Compounds are also tested against 3 H]U69593 (agonist) binding to this receptor. No compound is known to inhibit only agonist binding or antagonist binding. However, such a compound may have a unique pharmacological profile 15 as a result of its specificity for one region of the receptor.

Initial specificity is determined by testing compounds 3 H]diprenorphinei binding to cloned human mu and delta receptors at 10pM and titrating those compounds that inhibit binding by at least 80%. Compounds that do not have K i values at least 100-fold high against 20 mu and delta receptors may be more likely to have additional side effects and are not pursued to enable further evaluation of specific compounds.

Ref.

(14) Raynor et al., Mo. Pharmacol. US, 330-334 (1994) Inflamed knee joint hyperalgesia model and blood pressure response to compression of the inflamed knee joint Inflammation in a joint is often associated with hyperalgesia [pain during normal flexion and extension and during the application of gentle innocuous pressure] and/or 30 persistent pain [resting pain; Schaible et al. (1993) Pain 55: 5-54]. During the course of knee joint inflammation, a cascade of events occurs, which includes: synthesis and release of inflammatory mediators in the joint, (ii) release of neuropeptides from afferent fibers in the joint ca-vit, ,and (11iii) incred primay afferCnt outflow from group II, III, IV sensory fibers [Schaible et al. (1993) Pain 55: 5-54]. An important result of this cascade is that there is an augmentation in the response of small, lightly myelinated and unmyelinated afferents to low intensity stimuli. In this manner, the peripheral nerve innervating inflamed tissue can evoke an exaggerated behavioral response to otherwise innocuous stimuli, a state of hyperalgesia. Thus, inflammation of the knee joint will result in increased spontaneous afferent activity, the appearance of an exaggerated discharge with joint flexion and extension [Schaible et al. (1995) J. Neurophysiol. 54: 1109-1122] and signs of a pain-associated autonomic reaction [Sata et al (1984) Neurosci. Lett. 52: 55-60].

Injection of a mixture of kaolin and carrageenan into the knee joint induces an experimental arthritis. As exemplified below, this treatment was characterized by a reliable increase in joint volume and circumference. In the unanesthetized rat, these joint changes were accompanied by a tendency to avoid weight bearing, suggesting an ongoing pain state.

According to electrophysiological studies, in the course of the development of this acute arthritis, C and Ad units normally responding only to extreme joint distortion become activated by slight movement [Schaible et al. (1985) J. Neurophysiol. 54: 1109-1122]. Spinal neurons with knee joint receptive fields in the deep dorsal horn of the spinal cord show clear development of hyperexcitability with the acute inflammation in the joint [Neugebauer et al.

(1993) J. Neurosci. 70: 1365-1377]. This sensitization of group III and IV fibers was observed within 2-3 hours after injection of kaolin and carrageenan into the knee joint, a time course that closely matches the time course of the development of hyperalgesia in the rat knee joint compression model. These observations indicate that spinal cord neurons and joint primary afferent fibers become sensitized and may underlie hyperalgesia observed in this arthritic state. Such afferent input may drive autonomic responses that are typically associated with the processing of input from afferents typically activated by stimuli generated by the local inflammatory state. In addition to the above-mentioned inflamed knee joint mechanism, the blood pressure (BP) changes might also be evoked reflexively by afferent neural activity from receptors located in the skeletal muscle [Williamson et al. (1994) J.

Physiol. 475: 351-357]. This response is dependent on the changes in intramuscular pressure and the quality of muscle mass compressed. This particular mechanical reflex, however, S appears to operate independently of the pain response and appears to play a minor role in the exemplified experiments, as inflation of the cuff on the left normal knee joint had no effect upon BP. In any case, it is possible that overflow of the carrageenan from the joint capsule 25 may serve to render surrounding tissue inflamed as well. Sensitization of C and A units was S observed in the rat gastrocnemius muscle by infiltration with carrageenan [Handwerker et al.

(1991) Pain and Inflammation, Proceeding of the VIth World Congress on Pain, Bond et al.

eds., Elsevier Science Publishers BV, pp. 59-70]. Based on these considerations, it appears that compression of the inflamed knee joint yields a noxious stimulus and this in turn activates a sympathetic response resulting in an increase in BP.

Local inflammation of the knee results in a state where otherwise innocuous stimuli results in a prominent autonomic response, including increased blood pressure (BP) and heart rate [see, Sata et al (1984) Neurosci. Lett. 52: 55-60]. Alternatively, neural outflow from the inflamed knee is recorded [see, e.g. Neugebauer et al (1993) J. Neurosci. 70: 1365-1377].

An in vitro test that measures spontaneous discharge in injured skin by topical application may also be used. [see, Andreev et al. (1994) Neurosci. 58: 793-798].

ji;l:Tjll~-~r In vivo evaluation of formalin-induced nociception Administration of formalin into the paw results in a localized inflammation and a pain response that is moderate in intensity and continuous in duration. Unlike many other assays of nociception, the formalin assay measures tonic pain that is a result of tissue injury, and therefore is a model which is more relevant to clinical pain states in humans [see Tjolsen et al. (1992) Pain 51: 5-17]. In the rat the response to formalin-induced pain consists of spontaneous flinching behavior, characterized by paw lifting and paw shaking, and a rapid vibration of the paw after drawing it under the body. The flinching response can be reliably quantitated and exhibits two peaks of activity which are indicative of acute and tonic pain [Wheeler-Aceto and Cowan (1991) Psychopharmacology 104: 35-44]. The early or acute phase lasts from 0-5 min post-formalin and is followed by a quiescent period lasting approximately 15 min. The tonic phase occurs from 20-35 min following formalin injection and is the interval where the number of flinching responses is maximal. This model has been characterized in several species [Tjolsen et al. (1992) Pain 51: 5-17] and is sensitive to the analgesic effects of opiates administered by a variety of routes, including local administration directly into the paw. In addition, the test is particularly sensitive to the effects of K agonists [Wheeler-Aceto and Cowan (1991) Psychopharmacology 104: 35-44].

Inflammation is induced by subcutaneous injection of 50 ml of a 5% formalin solution into the dorsal surface of the right hind paw of male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 70-90 g.

20 Injections of drug are given into the dorsal surface of the paw prior to formalin injection, and flinching behavior is quantitated by counting the number of responses that occur during the tonic phase of pain, lasting from 20-35 min after formalin injection. Results are expressed as the mean percent antagonism of formalin-induced flinching calculated for individual drugtreated, formalin-injected rats using the following formula: .q (mean formalin response mean saline response) individual response x 100 mean formalin response mean saline response The mean formalin response is the mean behavioral score of vehicle-treated and formalininjected rats. The mean saline response is the pooled behavioral score from rats injected with ml of saline into the paw.

Randall-Selitto Test Numerous variations and exemplifications of this assay are known to those of skill in this art [see, Randall et al (1957) Arch. Int. Pharmacodyn. 111: 409-419; see, also, U.S.

Patent No. 5,434,292, U.S. Patent No. 5,369,131, U.S. Patent No. 5,345,943, U.S. Patent No.

5,242,944 and U.S. Patent No. 5,109,135.

-81- The pain threshold is measured in this method as the amount of pressure in g required to induce a flight reaction (struggle) when applied to the foot of an experimental animal exhibiting hyperalgesia, typically an inflamed paw, compared to a control, such as the same or equivalent animal in the absence of the inflammation, and/or in the absence of a test compound. Incremental pressure is applied to the paw with a wedge-shaped blunt piston onto the dorsal surface of the hind paw by means of a paw pressure analgesia meter. The pressure required to elicit paw withdrawal, the paw pressure threshold (PPT), is determined.

Stein and coworkers [Stein et al. (1988) Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav. 31: 445-451; Stein et al. (1989) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 248: 1269-1275] have developed a model of peripheral inflammation and hyperalgesia in rats, which supports the role of opiates in mediating peripheral analgesia. In this protocol, modified Freund's adjuvant is used as the inflammatory stimulus, and the paw pressure test is used to assess the response of the rat to a painful pressure stimulus. The model is sensitive to opiate agonists of the t, 8 and K subtypes, which produce analgesia upon administration [Antonijevic et al. (1995) J. Neurosci.

15 15: 165-172; Stein et al. (1988) Neurosci. Lett. 84: 225-228; Stein et al. (1989) J. Pharmacol.

Exp. Ther. 248: 1269-1275]. Histological verification of opiate receptor localization and density have confirmed that peripheral opiate receptors are accessible on primary afferent nerve fibers and are upregulated following inflammation [Hassan et al. (1993) Neuroscience 55: 185-193; Przewlocki et al. (1992) Neuroscience 48: 491-500].

20 Experiments are conducted in rats weighing 150-250 g at the time of inoculation.

Modified Freund's complete adjuvant (FCA) is used as the inflammatory stimulus. Rats are administered an i.pl. injection of the FCA suspension into the right hind foot. Hyperalgesia and antinociception are evaluated using the paw pressure test. The rat is gently restrained and incremental pressure is applied to the paw with a wedge-shaped blunt piston onto the dorsal 25 surface of the hind paw by means of a paw pressure analgesia meter. The pressure required to elicit paw withdrawal, the paw pressure threshold (PPT), is determined. A cutoff pressure of 250 g is used to avoid undue stress and pain to the animal. Baseline responding is established by determining the average of three consecutive trials separated by 10 sec. The same procedure is conducted on the contralateral side and the sequence of sides is alternated between animals to control for order effects. Typically injections are not made in the contralateral (noninflamed) paw; however, in selected cases drugs may be administered to the contralateral paw to evaluate the potential for drug effects in the absence of inflammation.

Analgesic activity is determined by expressing the increase in PPT resulting from the effect of the drug as a percentage of basal preinjection thresholds.

Hyperalgesia can also be produced by inflammatory stimuli such as yeast or carrageenan, endogenous inflammatory mediators such as bradykinin or prostaglandins, or other types of chemical irritants [see Hargreaves and Joris (1993) APS Journal 2: 51-59].

-82-

I

Acetic acid-induced writhing This test identifies novel agents which exhibit peripheral analgesic activity against visceral or chemical pain [see Barber and Gottschlich (1986) Med. Res. Rev. 12: 525-562; Ramabadran and Bansinath (1986) Pharm. Res. 3: 263-270]. Injection of acetic acid into the peritoneal cavity is used as the noxious stimulus, and the number of writhing responses that occur in response to acetic acid are counted in order to quantify the response to pain.

Compounds which possess analgesic activity reduce the number of writhing responses that occur. Opiate agonists of the m and k subtype exhibit analgesic activity in this model [Barber and Gottschlich (1986) Med. Res. Rev. 12: 525-562; Millan (1990) Trends Pharmacol. Sci.

11: 70-76]. Novel compounds which demonstrate potency and efficacy in this assay are potential drugs for the treatment of various pathological conditions involving peripheral pain.

The writhing assay is adapted from the procedure originally described by Taber et al.

[(1969) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 169: 29-38], using male CF-1 mice weighing 20-25 g.

Animals are treated with various doses of drugs prior to the administration of an i.p. injection of 0.6% acetic acid solution. Mice are then placed into observation chambers and the number of writhing responses, as defined by a full hindlimb extension and retraction, are recorded.

The mean number of writhing responses is calculated for vehicle-treated control mice, and the percent inhibition I) of writhing is calculated for each mouse that is treated with drug using the folllowing formula: I 100 x (mean control writhing responses individual test responses) mean control writhing responses Hyperalgesia induced by tape stripping 25 The objective of this assay is to identify novel agents which exhibit peripherallya mediated analgesia in circumstances, such as bums and abrasions, which lead to hyperalgesia.

In such injuries, the loss of the stratum comeum is followed by an inflammatory response (erythema) and a painful response to otherwise innocuous stimuli. Removal of the stratum corneum by repeated application and removal of cellophane tape, termed tape stripping, has been shown to be a simplified model of these injuries, which share characteristics of first degree bums [see Flynn (1985) Percutaneous Absorption, R.L. Bronaugh and H.I. Maibach, eds., Marcel Dekker Inc., pp. 18-42]. This method of barrier disruption avoids the application of potentially toxic chemicals and permits evaluation of peripheral analgesics following topical administration because tape stripping removes the barrier to effective topical therapy (the stratum comeum) while simultaneously resulting in inflammation and hyperalgesia.

Tape stripping has been validated in humans as a model for the testing of topical agents -83- [Pershing et al.(1994) Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 38: 90-95; Roy and Flynn (1990) Pharm. Res. 7: 842-847].

Experiments are conducted in male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250-500 g at the time of treatment. After anesthesia of the rat with ketamine-xylamine, a 1-3 cm 2 patch of rat skin is treated by repeated application and removal of tape. This procedure results in removal of the stratum corneum as determined by a glistening appearance of the skin. The tape stripped skin is evaluated for a visible erythema and for sensitivity to contact by heat or pressure stimuli using a focused beam of light, by testing in the paw pressure apparatus or by touch with von Frey hairs. The diameter of the von Frey hairs will be selected based on a diameter which causes no response in control rats but has a readily detectable response in treated rats.

Typically analgesics will be formulated in a suitable topical medium and applied to the treated skin. Some rats will receive only the topical medium without analgesic to control for an effect of the topical medium alone. The presence of analgesia is determined by the latency to respond to the heat stimulus or by response to touch or pressure.

Pharmacological activities of compounds of the present invention are shown in Tables S I, II, III and IV in which Ki: nM 3 H-diprenorphin and 3 H-U-69, 593) show in vitro binding assay results as described in In vitro binding assay (Primary Screen); and A 50 i.paw show in vivo formalin-induced nociception results as described in In vivo evaluation of 20 formalin-induced nociception"..

STABLE I Compounds of Formula I R-3a- *A R,S-8a-e, R =SO2CH3 N \R,S-9a-f, R C02CH 3 R N N 0 R,S-10a-f, R COCH3

O

Compounds R Ar Ki, nM Late Phase 3 H-Diprenorphin 3 H-U-69,593 Formalin

A

5 0 (mg);i.paw GR 89696 CO 2

CH

3 3,4 Cl 2 0.095, 0.10 1.6, 1.5 0.35(0.20-0.62)

(R)

ADL-01-0143-6 Bn 3,4 Cl 2 57, 38 9.3 53% 300 (R-1) ADL-01-0047-9 H 3,4 Cl 2 14, 17 1.5, 1.3 57% 300 -84- *5 5 S S 5q

S

a. S. 55

S

S

S* S S S

S*

Co p un sR Ar Ki, nM Late Phase j H-Diprenorphin 'H-U-69,593 Formalin 50 (mg);i.paw ADL-01-0039-6 SO 2

CH

3 3,4 C1 2 0.2, 1.3 0.19, 0.5 14(5.6-29) ADL-0l1-0040-4 CH 2

CO

2 t-Bu 3,4 C1 2 30%@ luM 75% luM 75%1 1 V ~M ADL-0l1-0042-0 CH 2

CO

2 H 3,4 C1 2 62%@ luM 23, 21 26% 300 (R-3c) ADL-0 1-0048-7 BnO 2 C 3,4 C1 2 36%@ luM 379, 249 Not tested.

(R-3d) cf' NHBoc ADL-01-0041-2 H0 2 C 3,4- C 2 39%@ luM 37,28 22% A @300 (R-3e) 0 NH 2 ADL-01-0148-5 COCH 3 3,4- C 2 4.2, 1.4 0.11,0.14 95% @300 (R-3f) ADL-01-0149-3 PO(OEt) 2 3,4 C1 2 99, 33 1.3, 1.4 54% 300 (R-3g) ADL-01-0150-1

COCF

3 3,4 -C 2 6.9, 1.8 0.26, 0.16 94% @300 (R-3h) ADL-01-0151-9 CONH 2 3,4 -C 2 56,29 2.9 68% @300 (R-3i) ADL-01-0156-8 CHO 3,4 C1 2 96%@ luM 0.40 65% 300 ADL-01-0165-9 S0 2 -Tol 3,4 C1 2 120 6.2 24% A 300 ADL-01-0135-2 SO 2

CH

3 3,4 C1 2 5.4, 4.0 0.37, 0.65 96% 300 (R,S-8a) ADL-0 1-0l 117-0 SO 2

CH

3

P-SO

2

CH

3 41% @luM 20, 31 Not tested.

(R,S-8b) ADL-0 1-0 119-6 S0 2

CH

3 o-NO 2 15%@luM 51%@luM Not tested.

(R,S-8c) ADL-0 1-0120-4 (R,S-8d) S0 2

CH

3 p-CF 3 16,17 1.3,1.9 16,17 .3,1.997% @300 *59* *5*S

S

*5@S 5* *5

S

S S

S

S. C

*SS**S

S

S

S* *S

S

5 *0 S S Compounds R Ar Ki, nM Late Phase 3 H-Diprenorphin 3 H-U-69,593 Formalin (mg);i.paw ADL-0 1-0 134-5 SO 2

CH

3 3-indole 74% 5.3, 3.2 Not tested.

(R,S-8e) ADL-01-0092-5 CO 2

CH

3

P-SO

2

CH

3 11 0.37, 0.42 46% 300 (RS-9a) ADL-0 1-0094-1 CO 2

CH

3 p-CF 3 0.49 0.076, 0.13 98% 300 (R,S-9b) ADL-01-0095-8 CO 2

CH

3 3-indole 3.0 0.27, 0.40 95% 300 (R,S-9c) ADL-0l1-0096-6 CO 2

CH

3 o-N0 2 37 0.74, 0.73 93% 300 (R,S-9d) ADL-0 1-0097-4 CO 2

CH

3 o-OCH 3 7.3 0.46, 1.3 98% 300 (R,S-9e) ADL-01-0098-2 CO 2

CH

3 o-NH 2 4.6, 3.2 0.67, 0.41 97% 300 (RS-9f) ADL-0 1-0 144-4 COCH 3

P-SO

2

CH

3 27% 2.3 6% 300 (R,S-I Oa) ADL-01-0145-1 COCH 3 p-CF 3 26, 24 2.0 89% 300 (R,S-I Ob) ADL-01-0157-6 COCH 3 o-CF 3 45%@ luM 16 Not tested.

ADL-01-0158-4 COCH 3 rn-NO 2 94%@ luM 0.72 Not tested.

(R,S-10d) ADL-01-0163-4 COCH 3 o-N0 2 541 24 Not tested.

(R,S-lOe) ADL-01-0159-2 COCH, p-NO 2 59%@ luM 2.4 Not tested.

(R,S-1O1) ADL-01-0093-3 Bn p-CF 3 2.2, 2.4 0.39, 0.57 92% 300 (RS-1 I I -86- TABLE II Compounds of Formula II 'HC1 .9 9 9 ewe .99 9* .4 9 5 9e@4 94r 9 4 Ki (nM) Ki (nM) Late Phase Compounds R, n R9 k k Formalin I[HI 13 HU69,593

A

5 0 (mg) Diprenorphin -H2C c -C 44% A ADL-0 1-0017-2 7-OCH 3 n=1 4.7 0.8 @300 CI @0 ADL-0 1-0020-6 7-OCH 3 n=1 -10 142 20 124 ADL-0 1-0018-0 7-OH, n=1 1H2C 1 0.6 0.18 7

CI

ADL-0 1-0021-4 7-OH, n=1 -10 549 432 Not tested.

-H

2 C C ADL-0 1-0019-8 7-OCH 2

CO

2 H, n=l I 40 7 39% 300

CI

ADL-01-0029-7 7-NO 2 n=1

-H

2 C 2 12.8 0.8 2 N CI ADL-01-0034-7 7-NO 2 n=1 -H 2 C NZ 57% 12.8 40% A

L~~~O

2

H

3 @1MM 300 S02CH3 ADL-01-0031-3 7-NO 2 ,n1 HC 9.6 0.7 891 ADL-01-0032-1 7-NH 2 n=1 -H 2 C 2.2 0.35 19

CI_

ADL-0 1-0052-9 7-N(CH 2

CO

2 Et) 2

-H

2 C cl 37% A n=l jJ 4.6 0.68 300 ADL-01-0037-0 7-N(CH 2

CO

2 tBu) 2

-H

2 C cl n=1 7.4 2.8 nM 155 ADL-0 1 -0044-6 7-N(CHCOH)2,

-H

2 C. Nz CI3 n=l 3.8 0.68 232 -87- CI -87- Ki (nM) Ki (nM) Late Phase Compounds R, n W 3k k Formalin [Hj 1 3 H1U69,593 A 50 (mg) Diprenorphin ADL-01-0070-1 7- -H 2 C zc

NH(CH

2 2

PO

3 Et 2 TCI 6.2 2.2 Not tested.

n=l ADL-01-0053-7 7-NHPO 3 Et 2 n=1 -H 2 C I 2.4 0.6 34 ADL-01-0090-9 7-SO 2

NCH

3 Bn, -H2C I z I n=l 48 8.0 Not tested.

6-OMe ADL-01-0099-0 7-SO 2

NCH

3 Bn, -H 2 C c.

n=1 200 40 Not tested.

ADL-01-0051-1 n=2 -H 2 C CI 21%A 8.4 2.8 300 ADL-01-0107-1 R=H, n=O -H 2 C c -a 12 2.0 300 ADL-0 1-0109-7 R=H, n=O -H 2 C 46% ADL-01-0108-9 R=H, n=O 29% 1 mM 146 Not tested.

ADL-01-0104-8 R=H, n=0

-H

2 C 0 2 5.7 0.74 Not tested.

ADL-01-0106-3 R=H, n0- -H 2 C -Z 75% 1 mM 9 Not tested.

0 2 N ~j CF 3 ADL-01-0105-5 R=H, n=0 -H 2 C s N0 2 92% (±)-Niravoline 13 1.8 @300 *r 9* I I FORMULATIONS OF THE PRESENT INVENTION Effective concentrations of one or more of the compounds of the present invention or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof are mixed with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier or vehicle for systemic, topical or local administration. Compounds are included in an amount effective for reducing the hyperalgesic state or other symptoms for which treatment is contemplated. The concentration of active compound in the composition will depend on absorption, inactivation, excretion rates of the active compound, the dosage schedule, and amount administered as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. For topical and local administration, the dosages are higher, typically at least about 5 to 10 fold, than the amount delivered when administered systemically orally.

The compounds of the present invention possess analgesic activity and can be used for the relief of pain without loss of consciousness. For example, compounds can be used to treat 15 muscle spasm, arthritis and other musculoskeletal conditions, bursitis, relieve mild to moderate postoperative and postpartum pain, dysmenorrhea and pain of traumatic origin.

Additionally, the compounds of the present invention can be administered for the treatment of severe pain, pain associated with adenocarcinoma, amputation of a limb, and third degree burns over a major portion of the body in animals and humans.

20 Selected compounds of the present invention have activity as narcotic antagonists.

They can be used to counteract or prevent excessive central nervous system depression and respiratory depression resulting from the administration of morphine or other morphine-like drugs, hydromorphone, oxymorphone, methadone and meperidine. The compounds are also capable of inducing an abstinence syndrome in narcotic addicted subjects, induce 25 withdrawal effects for diagnostic purposes.

S• The dosage of the compound of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V for analgesic purposes is from about 0.001 to about 20 mg/kg body weight of the patient. The compounds of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V are conveniently prepared in 5, 10, 25, 50, 75, 100 and 200 mg dosage units for administration for 1 to 4 times a day. Preferred unit dosages are from 0.05 to 10 mg/kg body weight of the patient.

The compounds are administered orally, parenterally, rectally and topically.

Pharmaceutical carriers or vehicles suitable for administration of the compounds and for the methods provided herein include any such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration. In addition, the compounds may be formulated as the sole pharmaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be combined with other active ingredients.

I a) Systemic Formulations The formulations of the present invention are provided for administration to humans and animals in unit dosage forms, such as tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granules, sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions, and oral solutions or suspensions, and oil-water emulsions containing suitable quantities of a compound of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V or pharmacologically acceptable salts thereof.

Pharmaceutical dosage unit forms are prepared to provide from about 0.05 mg to about 500 mg and preferably from about 1.0 to about 200 mg of the essential active ingredient or a combination of essential ingredients per dosage unit form.

Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms are either solid or liquid. The solid dosage forms are tablets, capsules, granules, and bulk powders. Types of oral tablets include compressed, chewable lozenges and tablets which may be enteric-coated, sugar-coated or film-coated.

Capsules may be hard or soft gelatin capsules, while granules and powders may be provided •in non-effervescent or effervescent form with the combination of other ingredients known to those skilled in the art.

Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers utilized in tablets are binders, lubricants, diluents, disintegrating agents, coloring agents, flavoring agents, and wetting agents. Entericcoated tablets, due to their enteric-coating, resist the action of stomach acid and dissolve or disintegrate in the neutral or alkaline intestines. Sugar-coated tablets are compressed tablets to which different layers of pharmaceutically acceptable substances have been applied. Film- Scoated tablets are compressed tablets which have been coated with a water soluble polymers.

Multiple compressed tablets are compressed tablets made by more than one compression cycle utilizing the pharmaceutically acceptable substances previously mentioned. Coloring agents may also be used in the above dosage forms. Flavoring and sweetening agents are used in compressed tablets, sugar-coated, multiple compressed and chewable tablets.

S Flavoring and sweetening agents are especially useful in the formation of chewable tablets and lozenges.

Examples of binders include glucose solution, acacia mucilage, gelatin solution, sucrose and starch paste. Lubricants include talc, starch, magnesium or calcium stearate, lycopodium and stearic acid. Diluents include, for example, lactose, sucrose, starch, kaolin, salt, mannitol and dicalcium phosphate. Disintegrating agents include corn starch, potato starch, bentonite, methylcellulose, agar and carboxymethylcellulose. Coloring agents include, for example, any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, mixtures thereof, and water insoluble FD and C dyes suspended on alumia hydrate. Sweetening agents include sucrose, lactose, mannitol and artificial sweetening agents such as sodium cyclamate and saccharin, and any number of spray dried flavors. Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such as fruits and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant sensation. Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene laural ether. Entericcoatings include fatty acids, fats, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac and cellulose acetate phthalates. Film coatings include hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000 and cellulose acetate phthalatd.

Liquid oral dosage forms include aqueous solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutions and/or suspensions reconstituted from non-effervescent granules and effervescent preparations reconstituted from effervescent granules. Aqueous solutions include, for example, elixirs and syrups. Emulsions are either oil-in water or water-in-oil.

Elixirs are clear, sweetened, hydroalcoholic preparations. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in elixirs include solvents. Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may contain a preservative. An emulsion is a two-phase system in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in emulsions are non-aqueous 15 liquids, emulsifying agents and preservatives. Suspensions use pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agents and preservatives. Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in noneffervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, include diluents, sweeteners and wetting agents. Pharmaceutically acceptable substance used in effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, include organic acids and a source 20 of carbon dioxide. Coloring and flavoring agents are used in all of the above dosage forms.

Solvents include glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol and syrup. Examples of preservatives include glycerin, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic acid, sodium benzoate and Salcohol. Examples of non-aqueous liquids utilized in emulsions include mineral oil and cottonseed oil. Examples of emulsifying agents include gelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, 25 and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate. Suspending agents include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum and acacia. Diluents include lactose and sucrose. Sweetening agents include sucrose, syrups, glycerin and artificial sweetening agents such as sodium cyclamate and saccharin. Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene lauryl ether. Organic acids include citric and tartaric acid. Sources of carbon dioxide include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate. Coloring agents include any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, and mixtures thereof. Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such fruits, and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant taste sensation.

Parenteral administration of the formulations of the present invention includes intravenous, subcutaneous and intramuscular administrations.

-91-

I

Preparations for parenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions. The solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous.

Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in parenteral preparations include aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable substances.

Examples of aqueous vehicles include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection, Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection.

Nonaqueous parenteral vehicles include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil. Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations must be added to parenteral preparations packaged in multiple-dose containers 15 which include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride. Isotonic agents include sodium chloride and dextrose. Buffers include phosphate and citrate. Antioxidants include sodium bisulfate. Local anesthetics include procaine hydrochloride. Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcelluose, I* 20 hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Emulsifying agents include Polysorbate 80 (Tween 80). A sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions include EDTA.

Pharmaceutical carriers also include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.

25 The concentration of the pharmaceutically active compound is adjusted so that an injection provides an effective amount to produce the desired pharmacological effect. The exact dose depends on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art.

The unit-dose parenteral preparations are packaged in an ampoule or a syringe with a needle.

All preparations for parenteral administration must be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art.

Illustratively, intravenous or intraarterial infusion of a sterile aqueous solution containing an active compound is an effective mode of administration. Another embodiment is a sterile aqueous or oily solution or suspension containing an active material injected as necessary to produce the desired pharmacological effect.

Pharmaceutical dosage forms for rectal administration are rectal suppositories, capsules and tablets for systemic effect.

Rectal suppositories are used herein mean solid bodies for insertion into the rectum which melt or soften at body temperature releasing one or more pharmacologically or therapeutically active ingredients.

Pharmaceutically acceptable substances utilized in rectal suppositories are bases or vehicles and agents to raise the melting point.

Examples of bases include cocoa butter (theobroma oil), glycerin-gelatin, carbowax, (polyoxyethylene glycol) and appropriate mixtures of mono-, di- and triglycerides of fatty acids. Combinations of the various bases may be used. Agents to raise the melting point of suppositories include spermaceti and wax. Rectal suppositories may be prepared either by the compressed method or by molding. The typical weight of a rectal suppository is about 2 to 3 gm.

Tablets and capsules for rectal administration are manufactured using the same 15 pharmaceutically acceptable substance and by the same methods as for formulations for oral administration.

The pharmaceutically therapeutically active compounds of Formulas I, II, III and IV are administered orally, parenterally or rectally in unit-dosage forms or multiple-dosage forms. Unit-dose forms as used herein refers to physically discrete units suitable for human 20 and animal subjects and packaged individually as is known in the art. Each unit-dose contains a predetermined quantity of the therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier, vehicle or diluent. Examples of unit-dose forms include ampoules and syringes individually packaged tablet or capsule. Unit-dose forms may be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. A multiple-dose form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit-dose form. Examples of multiple-dose forms include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules or bottles of pint or gallons. Hence, multiple dose form is a multiple of unit-doses which are not segregated in packaging.

Compounds of the present invention in formulations may be included with other active compounds to obtain desired combinations of properties. Other active compounds with known pharmacological properties include analgesics such as aspirin, phenacetin acetaminophen, propoxyphene, pentazocine, codeine, meperidine, oxycodone, mefenamic acid, and ibuprofen; muscle relaxants such as methocarbamol, orphenadrine, carisoprodol, meprobamate, chlorphenesin carbamate, diazepam, chlordiazepoxide and chlorzoxazone; analeptics such as caffeine, methylphenidate and pentylenetetrazol; corticosteroids such as methylprednisolone, prednisone, prednisolone and dexamethasone; antihistamines such as chlorpheniramine, cyproheptadine, promethazine and pyrilamine.

-93b) Local and Topical Formulations Typically a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain a concentration of at least about 0.1% w/w up to about 50% w/w or more, preferably more than 1% w/w of the active compound to the treated tissue. The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the tissue being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the age of the individual treated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the formulations, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed 15 formulations.

The compound may be suspended in micronized or other suitable form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble active product or to produce a prodrug. The form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The '20 effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the hyperalgesic or other condition and S may be empirically determined.

Compounds are typically included at concentrations 0.001% w/w or greater than 1% w/w up to 50% w/w or higher. The concentration is generally greater than the concentration for systemic administration of the compound. Preferable concentrations are in the range of 0.01% w/w to about 25%w/w, more preferably 1% w/w to 25% w/w, yet more preferably S greater than about 1% w/w to about 10% w/w, and most preferably greater than 1% w/w up to S"about 5% w/w. Aqueous suspensions and formulations contain 1% w/w or more.

The resulting mixture may be a solution, susDension- emulsions or the lilk and amr formulated as creams, gels, ointments, emulsions, solutions, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, or any other formulations suitable for topical or local administration.

The route of administration herein is topical or local administration, and compositions are formulated in a manner suitable for each route of administration. Preferred modes of administration include topical application to the skin, eyes or mucosa, and local application to the joints, such as by intra-articular injection. Thus, typical vehicles are those suitable for pharmaceutical or cosmetic application to body surfaces or for local injection.

-94- Pharmaceutical and cosmetic carriers or vehicles suitable for administration of the compounds provided herein include any such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration. In addition, the compounds may be formulated as the sole pharmaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be combined with other active ingredients. The active compound is included in the carrier in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful effect in the absence of serious toxic effects on the treated individual. The effective concentration may be determined empirically by testing the compounds using in vitro and in vivo systems, including the animal models described herein.

For topical administration, the compounds may be formulated in compositions in the form of gels, creams, lotions, solids, solutions or suspensions, or aerosols. Compositions for treating human skin are formulated for topical application with an anti-hyperalgesic effective amount of one or more of the compounds selected as described herein, in an effective concentration range [by weight], between about 0.1% and 80%, preferably 0.1 to 50%, more 15 preferably greater than about 1% up to about 50% or more in a cream, ointment, lotion, gel, solution or solid base or vehicle known in the art to be non-toxic and dermatologically acceptable or suitable for application to the mucosa. Aqueous suspensions are preferably formulated at concentrations greater than about 1% w/w, more preferably 2% w/w.

To formulate a composition, the weight fraction of compound is dissolved, suspended, 20 dispersed or otherwise mixed in a selected vehicle at an effective concentration such that the S"hyperalgesic condition is relieved or ameliorated. Generally, emollient or lubricating vehicles that help hydrate the skin are more preferred than volatile vehicles, such as ethanol, that dry Sthe skin. Examples of suitable bases or vehicles for preparing compositions for use with human skin are petrolatum, petrolatum plus volatile silicones, lanolin, cold cream [USP], and 25 hydrophilic ointment

[USP].

C The choice of an acceptable vehicle is largely determined by the mode of application and tissue to be treated. Suitable pharmaceutically and dermatologically acceptable vehicles for topical application include those suited fnr jse inloi c1mn: 1 .IV. cun, solutions, gels, tapes and the like. Generally, the vehicle is either organic in nature or an aqueous emulsion and capable of having the selected compound or compounds, which may be micronized, dispersed, suspended or dissolved therein. The vehicle may include pharmaceuticallyacceptable emollients, skin penetration enhancers, coloring agents, fragrances, emulsifiers, thickening agents, and solvents.

For local internal administration, such as intra-articular administration, the compounds are preferably formulated as a suspension in an aqueous-based medium, such as isotonically buffered saline or are combined with a biocompatible support or bioadhesive intended for internal administration.

Lotions The lotions contain an effective concentration of one or more of the compounds. The effective concatenation is preferably effective to deliver an anti-hyperalgesic amount, typically at a concentration of between about 0.1 50% w/w or more of one or more of the compounds provided herein. The lotions also contain from 1% to 50% w/w, preferably from 3% to 15% w/w of an emollient and the balance water, a suitable buffer, a C2 or C3 alcohol, or a mixture of water of the buffer and the alcohol. Any emollients known to those of skill in the art as suitable for application to human skin may be used. These include, but are not limited to, the following: Hydrocarbon oils and waxed, including mineral oil, petrolatum, paraffin, ceresin, ozokerite, microcrystalline wax, polyethylene, and perhydrosqualene.

Silicone oils, including dimethylpolysiloxanes, methylphenylpolysiloxanes water-soluble and alcohol-soluble silicone-glycol copolymers.

Triglyceride fats and oils, including those derived from vegetable, animal and marine sources. Examples include, but are not limited to, castor oil, safflower oil, cotton seed Soil, corn oil, olive oil, cod liver oil, almond oil, avocado oil, palm oil, sesame oil and soybean oil.

Acetoglyceride esters, such as acetylated monoglycerides.

20 Ethoxylated glycerides, such as ethoxylated glyceryl monostearate.

Alkyl esters of fatty acids having 10 to 20 carbon atoms. Methyl, isopropyl and butyl esters of fatty acids are useful herein. Examples include, but are not limited to, hexyl S...laurate, isohexyl laurate, isohexyl palmitate, isopropyl palmitate, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isodecyl oleate, hexadecyl stearate, decyl stearate, isopropyl isostearate diisopropyl adipate, diisohexyl adipate, dihexyldecyl adipate, diisopropyl sebacate, lauryl lactate, myristyl lactate, and cetyl lactate.

Alkenyl esters of fatty acids having 10 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include, but are not limited to, oleyl myristate, oleyl stearate, and oleyl oleate.

Fatty acids having 9 to 22 carbon atoms. Suitable examples include, but are not limited to pelargonic, lauric, myristic, palmitic, stearic, isostearic, hydroxystearic, oleic, linoleic, ricinoleic, arachidonic, behenic, and erucic acids.

Fatty alcohols having 10 to 20 carbon atoms, such as but not limited to, lauryl, myristyl, cetyl, hexadecyl, stearyl, isostearyl, hydroxystearyl, oleyl, ricinoleyl, behenyl, erucyl, and 2 -octyl dodecyl alcohols.

Fatty alcohol ethers, including, but not limited to, ethoxylated fatty alcohols of to 20 carbon atoms, such as, but are not limited to, the lauryl cetyl, stearyl, isostearyl, oleyl, and cholesterol alcohols having attached thereto from 1 to 50 ethylene oxide groups or 1 to 50 propylene oxide groups or mixtures thereof.

Ether-esters, such as fatty acid esters of ethoxylated fatty alcohols.

Lanolin and derivatives, including but not limited to, lanolin, lanolin oil, lanolin wax, lanolin alcohols, lanolin fatty acids, isopropyl lanolate, ethoxylated lanolin, ethoxylated lanolin alcohols, ethoxylated cholesterol, propoxylated lanolin alcohols, acetylated lanolin, acetylated lanolin alcohols, lanolin alcohols linoleate, lanolin alcohols ricinoleate, acetate of lanolin alcohols ricinoleate, acetate of ethoxylated alcohols-esters, hydrogenolysis of lanolin, ethoxylated hydrogenated lanolin, ethoxylated sorbitol lanolin, and liquid and semisolid lanolin absorption bases.

Polyhydric alcohols and polyether derivatives, including, but not limited to, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, polypropylene glycol 2000-4000], polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene glycols, polyoxypropylene polyoxyethylene glycols, glycerol, ethoxylated glycerol, propoxylated glycerol, sorbitol, ethoxylated sorbitol, hydroxypropyl sorbitol, polyethylene glycol 200-6000], methoxy polyethylene glycols 350, 550, 750, 2000, 5000, poly)ethylene oxide) homopolymers 100,000 5,000,000], polyalkylene glycols and derivatives, hexylene glycol 2 -methyl-2,4-pentanediol), 1,3butylene glycol, 1, 2 ,6-hexanetriol, ethohexadiol USP (2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol), C15-C18 vicinal glycol and polyoxypropylene derivatives of trimethylolpropane.

20 Polyhydric alcohol esters, including, but not limited to, ethylene glycol mono- Sand di-fatty acid esters, diethylene glycol mono- and di-fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol 200-6000], mono- and di-fatty esters, propylene glycol mono- and di-fatty acid esters, S.:polypropylene glycol 2000 monooleate, polypropylene glycol 2000 monostearate, ethoxylated propylene glycol monostearate, glyceryl mono- and di-fatty acid esters, polyglycerol polyfatty acid esters, ethoxylated glyceryl monostearate, 1,3-butylene glycol monostearate, 1,3butylene glycol distearate, polyoxyethylene polyol fatty acid ester, sorbitan fatty acid esters, and polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters.

Wax esters, including, but not limited to, beeswax, spermaceti, myristyl myristate, and stearyl stearate and beeswax derivatives, including, but not limited to, polyoxyethylene sorbitol beeswax, which are reaction products of beeswax with ethoxylated sorbitol of varying ethylene oxide content that form a mixture of ether-esters.

Vegetable waxes, including, but not limited to, carnauba and candelilla waxes.

Phospholipids, such as lecithin and derivatives.

Sterols, including, but not limited to, cholesterol and cholesterol fatty acid esters.

Amides, such as fatty acid amides, ethoxylated fatty acid amides, and solid fatty acid alkanolamides.

-97- The lotions further preferably contain from 1% w/w to 10% w/w, more preferably from 2% w/w to 5% w/w, of an emulsifier. The emulsifiers can be nonionic, anionic or cationic. Examples of satisfactory nonionic emulsifiers include, but are not limited to, fatty alcohols having 10 to 20 carbon atoms, fatty alcohols having 10 to 20 carbon atoms condensed with 2 to 20 moles of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide, alkyl phenols with 6 to 12 carbon atoms in the alkyl chain condensed with 2 to 20 moles of ethylene oxide, monoand di-fatty acid esters of ethylene oxides mono- and di-fatty acid esters of ethylene glycol wherein the fatty acid moiety contains from 10 to 20 carbon atoms, diethylene glycol, polyethylene glycols of molecular weight 200 to 6000, propylene glycols of molecular weight 200 to 3000, glycerol, sorbitol, sorbitan, polyoxyethylene sorbitol, polyoxyethylene sorbitan and hydrophilic wax esters. Suitable anionic emulsifiers include, but are not limited to, the fatty acid soaps, e.g. sodium, potassium and triethanolamine soaps, wherein the fatty acid moiety contains from 10 to 20 carbon atoms. Other suitable anionic emulsifiers include, but are not limited to, the alkali metal, ammonium or substituted ammonium alkyl sulfates, alkyl arylsulfonates, and alkyl ethoxy ether sulfonates having 10 to 30 carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety. The alkyl ethoxy ether sulfonates contain from 1 to 50 ethylene oxide units. Among satisfactory cationic emulsifiers are quaternary ammonium, morpholinium and pyridinium compounds. Certain of the emollients described in preceding paragraphs also have emulsifying properties. When a lotion is formulated containing such an emollient, an 20 additional emulsifier is not needed, though it can be included in the composition.

The balance of the lotion is water or a C2 or C3 alcohol, or a mixture of water and the alcohol. The lotions are formulated by simply admixing all of the components together.

Preferably, the compound, is dissolved, suspended or otherwise uniformly dispersed in the mixture.

25 Other conventional components of such lotions may be included. One such additive is a thickening agent at a level from 1% to 10% w/w of the composition. Examples of suitable thickening agents include, but are not limited to: cross-linked carboxypolymethylene polymers, ethyl cellulose, polyethylene glycols. gum. tragacanth, gum kharaya, xanthan gums and bentonite, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and hydroxypropyl cellulose.

Creams The creams are formulated to contain concentration effective to deliver an antihyperalgesic effective amount of the compound to the treated tissue, typically at between about preferably at greater than 1% up to and greater than 50%, preferably between about 3% and 50%, more preferably between about 5% and 15% of one or more of the compounds provided herein. The creams also contain from 5% to 50%, preferably from to 25%, of an emollient and the remainder is water or other suitable non-toxic carrier, such as -98an isotonic buffer. The emollients, as described above for the lotions, can also be used in the cream compositions. The cream may also contain a suitable emulsifier, as described above.

The emulsifier is included in the composition at a level from 3% to 50%, preferably from to Solutions and suspensions for topical and local administration The solutions are formulated to contain an amount of one or more compounds effective to deliver an anti-hyperalgesic amount, typically at a concentration of between about 0.1 50% w/w, preferably at least more than 1% w/w, more preferably more than 2% w/w of one or more of the compounds provided herein. The balance is water, a suitable organic solvent or other suitable solvent or buffer. Suitable organic materials useful as the solvent or a part of a solvent system are as follows: propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 200- 600], polypropylene glycol 425-2025], glycerine, sorbitol esters, 1,2,6-hexanetriol, ethanol, isopropanol, diethyl tartrate, butanediol and mixtures thereof. Such solvent systems 9 15 can also contain water.

@9 ~Solutions or suspensions used for local application can include any of the following components: a sterile diluent, such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oil, polyethylene glycol, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvent; antimicrobial o9. agents, such as benzyl alcohol and methyl parabens; antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid and 20 sodium bisulfite; chelating agnets, such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid [EDTA]; buffers, such as acetates, citrates and phosphates; and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. Liquid preparations can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass, plastic or other suitable material. Suitable carriers may include physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline [PBS], and the suspensions and solutions may contain thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, 0Oo polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof. Liposomal suspensions, may also be suitable as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These may be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art.

These compositions that are formulated as solutions or suspensions may be applied to the skin, or may be formulated as an aerosol or foam and applied to the skin as a spray-on.

The aerosol compositions typically contain from 25% to 80% w/w, preferably from 30% to w/w, of a suitable propellant. Examples of such propellants are the chlorinated, fluorinated and chlorofluorinated lower molecular weight hydrocarbons. Nitrous oxide, carbon dioxide, butane, and propane are also used as propellant gases. These propellants are used as understood in the art in a quantity and under a pressure suitable to expel the contents of the container.

Suitably prepared solutions and suspension may also be topically applied to the eyes and mucosa. Solutions, particularly those intended for opthalmic use, may be formulated as 0.01% 10% w/w isotonic solutions, pH about 5-7, with appropriate salts, and preferably containing one or more of the compounds herein at a concentration of about 0.1% w/w preferably greater than 1% w/w, up to 50% w/w or more. Suitable opthalmic solutions are known [see, e.g. U.S. Patent No. 5,116,868, which describes typical compositions of opthalmic irrigation solutions and solutions for topical application]. Such solutions, which have a pH adjusted to about 7.4, contain, for example, 90-100 mM sodium chloride, 4-6 mM dibasic potassium phosphate, 4-6 mM dibasic sodium phosphate, 8-12 mM sodium citrate, 0.5-1.5 mM magnesium chloride, 1.5-2.5 mM calcium chloride, 15-25 mM sodium acetate, 10-20 mM D.L.-sodium B-hydroxybutyrate and 5-5.5 mM glucose.

The active compounds of the present invention can also be mixed with other active materials, that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, including viscoelastic materials, such as hyaluronic acid, which is sold under the trademark HEALON solution of a high molecular weight (MW of about 3 million) fraction S of sodium hyaluronate; manufactured by Pharmacia, Inc. see, U.S. Patent Nos.

5,292,362, 5,282,851, 5,273,056, 5,229,127, 4,517,295 and 4,328,803], VISCOAT [fluorinecontaining (meth) acrylates, such as, 1 H, 2H, 2 H-heptadecafluorodecylmethacrylate; see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,278,126, 5,273,751 and 5,214,080; commercially available from Alcon Surgical, Inc.], ORCOLON [see, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,273,056; commercially available from Optical Radiation Corporation], methylcellulose, methyl hyaluronate, polyacrylamide i and polymethacrylamide [see, U.S. Patent No. 5,273,751]. The viscoelastic materials are present generally in amounts ranging from about 0.5 to 5.0% w/w, preferably 1 to 3% w/w of the conjugate material and serve to coat and protect the treated tissues. The compositions 25 may also include a dye, such as methylene blue or other inert dye, so that the composition can be seen when injected into the eye or contacted with the surgical site during surgery.

Gels Gel compositions can be formulated by simply admixing a suitable thickening agent to the previously described solution or suspension composition. Examples of suitable thickening agents have been previously described with respect to the lotions.

The gelled compositions contain an effective amount of one or more of an antihyperalgesic amount, typically at a concentration of between about 0.1 50% w/w or more of one or more of the compounds provided therein; from 5% to 75% w/w, preferably from 10% to 50% w/w, of an organic solvent as previously described; from 0.5% to w/w, preferably from 1% to 10% w/w of the thickening agent; the balance being water or other aqueous carrier.

-100- Solids Compositions of solid forms may be formulated as stick-type compositions intended for application to the lips or other parts of the body. Such compositions contain an effective amount of one or more of the compounds provided therein. The amount is typically an amount effective to deliver an anti-hyperyperalgesic amount, typically at a concentration of between about 0.1 50% w/w or more of one or more of the compounds provided herein.

The solids also contain from about 40% to 98% w/w, preferably from about 50% to 905 w/w, of the previously described emollients. This composition can further contain from 1% to 20% w/w, preferably from 5% to 15% w/w, of a suitable thickening agent, and, if desired or needed, emulsifiers and water or buffers. Thickening agents previously described with respect to lotions are suitably employed in the composition in solid form.

O. ther ingredients such as preservatives, including methyl-paraben or ethyl-paraben, perfumes, dyes or the like, that are known in the art to provide desirable stability, fragrance or color, or other desirable properties, such as shielding from actinic rays from the sun, to compositions for application to the skin may also be employed in a composition for such topical application.

Additional ingredients Other active ingredients include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, antivirals, antifungals, anti-inflammatories, including steroidal and non-steroidal anti-inflammatories, anesthetics and mixtures thereof. Such additional ingredients include any of the following: a. Antibacterial agents Aminoglycosides, such as Amikacin, Apramycin, Arbekacin, Bambermycins, 25 Butirosin, Dibekacin, Dihydrostreptomycin, Fortimicin(s), Fradiomycin, Gentamicin, Ispamicin, Kanamycin, Micronomicin, Neomycin, Neomycin Undecylenate, Netilmicin, Paromomycin, Ribostamycin, Sisomicin, Spectinomycin, Streptomycin, Streptonicozid and Tobramycin; Amphenicols, such as Azidamfenicol, Chloramphenicol, Chloramphenicol Palmirate, Chloramphenicol Pantothenate, Florfenicol, Thiamphenicol; Ansamycins, such as Rifamide, Rifampin, Rifamycin and Rifaximin; B-Lactams; Carbapenems, such as Imipenem; Cephalosporins, such as 1-Carba (dethia) Cephalosporin, Cefactor, Cefadroxil, Cefamandole, Cefatrizine, Cefazedone, Cefazolin, Cefixime, Cefmenoxime, Cefodizime, Cefonicid, Cefoperazone, Ceforanide, Cefotaxime, Cefotiam, Cefpimizole, Cefpirimide, Cefpodoxime Proxetil, Cefroxadine, Cefsulodin, Ceftazidime, Cefteram, Ceftezole, -101- Ceftibuten, Ceftizoxime, Ceftriaxone, Cefuroxime, Cefuzonam, Cephacetrile Sodium, Cephalexin, Cephaloglycin, Cephaloridine, Cephalosporin, Cephalothin, Cephapirin Sodium, Cephradine and Pivcefalexin; Ceoxiin;Cephamycins such as Cebuperazone, Cefmfetazole, Cefmfinox, Cefetan and Monobactams such as Aztreonam, Carumonam and Tigemonan; Oxacephems such as Flomoxef and Moxolactam; Penicillins such as Amidinocillin, Amdinocillin, Pivoxil, Amoxicillin, Ampicillan, Apalcillin, Aspoxicillin, Azidocillan, Azlocillan, Bacampicillin, IBenzylpenicillinic Acid, Benzylpenicillin, Carbenicillin, Carfecillin, Carindacillin, Clometocillin, Cloxacillin, Cyclacillin, Dicloxacillin, Diphenicillin, Epicillin, Fenbenicillin, Floxicillin, H-etacillin, Lenampicillin, Metampicillin, Methicillin, Meziocillin, Nafcillin, Oxacillin, Penamecillin,, Penethamate Hydriodide, Penicillin G Benethamine, Penicillin

G

Benzathine, Penicillin G Benzhydrylamine, Penicillin G Calcium, Penicillin G Jlydragamine, Penicillin G Potassium, Penicillin G. Procaine, Penicillin N, Penicillin 0, Penicillin

V,

Penicillin V Benzathine, Penicillin V 1-ydrabamine, Penimepicycline, Phenethicillin, Piperacillin, Pivapicillin, Propicillin, Quinacillin, Sulbenicillin, Talampicillin, Temocillin and Ticarcillin; Lincosamides such as Clindamycin and Lincomycin; Macrolides such as Azithromycin, Carbomycin, Clarithromycin, Erythromycin(s) and Derivatives, Josamycin, Leucomycins, Midecamycins, Miokamycin, Oleandomycin, Primycin, Rokitamycin, Rosaramicin, Roxithromycin, Spiramycin and Troleandomycin; c~*Polypeptides such as Amphomycin, Bacitracin, Capreomycin, Colistin, Enduracidin, Enviomycin, Fusafungine, Gramicidin(s), Gramicidin S, Mikamycin, *9 Polymyxin, Polymyxin B-Methanesulfonic Acid, Pristinamycin, Ristocetin, Teicoplanin, Thiostrepton, Tuberactinomycin, Tyrocidine, Tyrothricin, Vancomycin, Viomycin(s), Virginiamycin and Zinc Bacitracin; Tetracyclines such as Spicycline, Chlortetracycline, Clomocycline, Demeclocycline, Doxycycline, Guamecycline, Lymecycline, Meclocycline, Methacycline, Minocycline, Oxytetracycline, Penimepicycline, Pipacycline, Rolitetracycline, Sancycline, Senociclin and Tetracycline; and others such as Cycloserine, Mupirocin, Tuberin.

b. Synthetic Antibacterials 2 4 -Diaminopyrimidines such as Brodimoprim, Tetroxoprim and Trimethoprim; -102- Nitrofurans such as Furaltadone, Furazolium, Nifuradene, Nifuratel, Nifurfoline, Nifurpirinol, Nifurprazine, Nifurtoinol and Nitrofurantoin; Quinolones and analogs thereof, such as Amifloxacin, Cinoxacin, Ciprofloxacin, Difloxacin, Enoxacin, Fleroxacin, Flumequine, Lomefloxacin, Miloxacin, Nalidixic Acid, Norfioxacin, Ofloxacin, Oxolinic Acid, Perfioxacin, Pipemidic Acid, Piromidic Acid, Rosoxacin, Temnafloxacin and Tosufloxacin; Sulfonamides such as Acetyl Sulfamethoxypyrazine, Acetyl Sulfisoxazole, Azosulfamide, Benzylsulfamide, Chloramine-3, Chloramine-T, Dichloramine-T, Formosulfathiazole,

N

2 -Formyl-sulfisomidine,

N

4 -B3-D-Glucosylsulfanilamnide, Mafenide, 4'- (Methyl-sulfamnoyl)sulfanilanilide, p-Nitrosulfathiazole, Noprylsulfamide, Phthalylsulfacetamide, Phthalylsulfathiazole, Salazosulfadimidine, Succinylsulfathiazole, Sulfabenzamide, Sulfacetamide, Sulfachiorpyridazine, Sulfachrysoidine, Sulfacytine, Sulfadiazine, Sulfadicramide, Sulfadimethoxine, Sulfadoxine, Sulfaethidole, Sulfaguanidine, Sulfaguanol, Sulfalene, Sulfaloxic Acid, Sulfamerazine, Sulfameter, Sulfamethazine, 150 Sulfamethizole, Sulfamethomidine, Sulfamethoxazole, Sulfamethoxypyridazine, *o Sulfametrole, sulfamidochrysoidine, Sulfamoxole, Sulfanilamide, Sulfanilamidomethanesulfonic Acid Triethanolamine Salt, 4 -Sulfanilamidosalicyclic Acid,

N

4 -Sulfanilylsulfanilamide, Sulfanilylurea, N-Sulfanilyl-3 ,4-xylamide, Sulfanitran, Sulfaperine, Sulfaphenazole, Sulfaproxyline, Sulfapyrazine, Sulfapyridine, Sulfasomizole, Sulfasymazine, Sulfathiazole, Sulfathiourea, Sulfatolamide, Sulfisomidine and Sulfisoxazole; S Sulfones, such as Acedapsone, Acediasulfone, Acetosulfone, Dapsone, Diathymosulfone, Glucosulfone, Solasulfone, Succisulfone, Sulfanilic Acid, p- Sulfanilylbenzylamine, p,p'-sulfonyldianiline-N,N'digalactoside, Sulfoxone and 25 Thiazolsulfone; 2: 5 Others such as Clofoctol, Hexedine, Magainins, Methenamine, Methenamine Anhydromethylene-citrate, Methenamnine Hippurate, Methenamine Mandelate, Methenamine Sulfosalicylate, Nitroxoline, Squalamine and Xibornol.

C. Antifungal (antibiotics) Polyenes such as Amphotericin-B, Candicidin, Dermostatin,' Filipin, Fungichromin, Hachimycin, Hamycin, Lucensomycin, Mepartricin, Natamycin, Nystatin, Pecilocin, Perimycin; and others, such as Azaserine, Griseoflilvin, Oligomycins, Pyrrolnitrin, Siccanin, Tubercidin and Viridin.

d. Antifungal (synthetic) Allylamines such as Naftifine and terbinafine; -103-

I

Imidazoles such as Bifonazole, Butoconazole, Chiordantoin, Chiormidazole, Cloconazole, Clotrimazole, Econazole, Enilconazole, Finticonazole, Isoconazole, Ketoconazole, Miconazole, Omnoconazole, Oxiconazole Nitrate, Sulconazole and Tioconazole; Triazoles such as Fluconazole, Itraconazole, Terconazole; Others such as Acrisorcin, Amorolfine, Biphenamine, Bromosalicylchloranilide, Buclosamide, Chiophenesin, Ciclopirox, Cloxyquin, Coparaffinate, Diamthazole, Dihydrochioride, Exalamide, Flucytosine, Halethazole, Hexetidine, Loflucarban, Nifuratel, Potassium Iodide, Propionic Acid, Pyrithione, Salicylanilide, Sulbentine, Tenonitrozole, Tolciclate, Tolindate, Tolnaftate, Tricetin, Ujothion, and Undecylenic Acid.

-104e. Antiglaucoma agents Antiglaucoma agents, such as Dapiprazoke, Dichiorphenamide, Dipivefrmn and Pilocarpine.

f. Anti-inflammatory agents Corticosteroids, aminoarylcarboxylic Acid Derivatives such as Etofenamate, Meclofenamic Acid, Mefanamic Acid, Niflumic Acid; Arylacetic Acid Derivatives such as Acemetacin, Amfenac Cinmetacin, Clopirac, Diclofenac, Fenclofenac, Fenclorac, Fenclozic Acid, Fentiazac, Glucametacin, Isozepac, Lonazolac, Metiazinic Acid, Oxametacine, Proglumetacin, Sulindac, Tiaramide and Tolmetin; Arylbutyric Acid Derivatives such as Butibufen and Fenbufen; Arylcarboxylic Acids such as Clidanac, Ketorolac and Tinoridine; Aryipropionic Acid Derivatives such as Bucloxic Acid, Carprofen, Fenoprofen, Flunoxaprofen, Ibuprofen, Ibuproxam, Oxaprozin, Piketoprofen, Pirprofen, Pranoprofen, Protizinic Acid and Tiaprofenic Acid; Pyrazoles such as Mepirizole; Pyrazolones such as Clofezone, Feprazone, Mofebutazone, Oxyphenbutazone, Phenylbutazone, Phenyl Pyrazolidininones, Suxibuzone and Thiazolinobutazone; Salicylic Acid Derivatives such as Bromosaligenin, Fendosal, Glycol Sal;icylate, Mesalamine, 1-Naphthyl Salicylate, Olsalazine and Sulfasalazine; Thiazinecarboxamides such as Droxicam, Isoxicam and Piroxicam; Others such as e-Acetamidocaproic Acid, S-Adenosylmethionine, 3-Amino-4hydroxybutyric Acid, Amixetrine, Bendazac, Bucolome, Carbazones, Difenpiramide, Ditazol, 25 Guaiazulene, Heterocyclic Aminoalkyl Esters of Mycophenolic Acid and Derivatives, Nabumetone, Nimesulide, Orgotein, Oxaceprol, Oxazole Derivatives, Paranyline, Pifoxime, 2-substituted-4, 6 -di-tertiary-butyl-s-hydroxy-1,3-pyrimidines, Proquazone and Tenidap.

g. Antiseptics Guanidines such as Alexidine, Ambazone, Chiorhexidine and Picloxydine; Halogens/Halogen Compounds such as Bornyl Chloride, Calcium Iodate, Iodine, Iodine Monochioride, Iodine Trichioride, lodoform, Povidone-Jodine, Sodium Hypochiorite, Sodium Iodate, Symclosene, Thymol Iodide, Triclocarban, Triclosan and Troclosene Potassium; Nitrofurans such as Furazolidone, Nidroxyzone, Nifuroxime, Nifurzide and Nitrofurazone; -105- Phenols such as Acetomeroctol, Chloroxylenol, Hexachlorophene, 1-Naphthyl Salicylate, 2 4 ,6-Tribromo-m-cresol and 3', 4 Quinolines such as Aminoquinuride, Chloroxine, Chlorquinaldol, Cloxyquin, Ethylhydrocupreine, Halquinol, Hydrastine, 8-Hydroxyquinoline and Sulfate; and others, such as Boric Acid, Chloroazodin, m-Cresyl Acetate, Cupric sulfate and Ichthammol.

h. Antivirals Purines/Pyrimidinones, such as 2-Acetyl-Pyridine pyridylamino)thiocarbonyl) Thiocarbonohydrazone, Acyclovir, Dideoxyadenosine, dideoxycytidine, Dideoxyinosine, Edoxudine, Floxuridine, Ganciclovir, Idoxuridine, MADU, Pyridinone, Trifluridine, Vidrarbine and Zidovudline; Others such as Acetylleucine Monoethanolamine, Acridinamine, Alkylisooxazoles, Amantadine, Amidinomycin, Cuminaldehyde Thiosemicarbzone, 15 Foscarnet Sodium, Kethoxal, Lysozyme, Methisazone, Moroxydine, Podophyllotoxin, Ribavirin, Rimantadine, Stallimycin, Statolon, Thymosins, Tromantadine and Xenazoic Acid.

Combinations and kits The compounds and compositions containing the compounds may also be coated on bandages, mixed with bioadhesives or included in dressings. Thus, combinations of bandages, bioadhesives, dressings and other such materials and the compositions formulated as described herein are provided. Kits containing these combinations, which may also include compositions containing the above listed agents, are also provided.

*a

C

25 Articles of manufacture The compounds and compositions provided herein may be packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, one or more of the compounds provided herein, which is effective for ameliorating peripheral hyperalgesia, within the packaging material, and a label that indicates that the compound, N-oxide, acid, salt or other derivative thereof is used for treating hyperalgesic conditions.

Methods of treatment Compositions for use with human skin preferably may be applied at least once per day, or if necessary, to achieve the desired result, more often, to the areas of the skin for which treatment is sought. It is understood that the precise treatment regimen depends upon the individual treated and may be ascertained empirically depending upon the formulation, and particularly, the age of the treated individual. Any regimen is acceptable as long as the -106desired anti-hyperalgesic effects are achieved without substantial deleterious or sustained undesirable side effects.

The methods for treating human skin are practiced by applying to the skin, preferably at least daily, a composition suitable for human skin treatment or treatment of mucosal membranes and other body surface tissues, including the vagina, rectum, mouth, eyes and other such tissues. The compositions may be injected into joints or other inflamed areas.

Compositions may be combined with bandages, bioadhesives and other dressings and applied to the body in combination therewith.

The following examples are included for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.

Example A Capsules Active Compound 2.5 gm Corn starch 2 3.0 gm Lactose 14 5.0 gm Talc 15.0 gm Magnesium stearate 3.0 gm The ingredients were mixed and were encapsulated using techniques practiced in the art.

Example B Tablet Active Compound 150 gm Lactose 1 2 5 gm Corn starch 50 gm Magnesium stearate 2.0 gm Liquid Petrolatum 2.0 gm ihe ingredients were mixed, then put through U.S. Standard Screens to produce fine granules. The granules were compressed into tablets, each tablet containing about 150 mg of an active compound of the present invention.

Example C Syrup Active Compound 25 gm Lemon Oil 2 ml Sucrose 650 gm Citric Acid 4 gm -107- Benzoic Acid 3 gm Tragacanth 16 gm Deionized water q.s. 1000 ml The ingredients, without the active compound, are dispersed in water to make about 800 to 900 ml of solution. The active compound is then added and the solution is stirred into a syrup. Water is then added to make 1000 ml of the syrup.

Example D Parenteral Solution Active Compound 30 gm Methylparaben 3 gm Propylparaben 1 gm S Lidocaine 5 gm 15 Deionized water q.s. 1000 ml The ingredients are dissolved in water to provide a solution followed by sterilization by filtration.

Example E Rectal Suppository S Active Compound 80 gm g Propylene glycol 95 gm 25 Polyethylene glycol 4000 1800 gm

C

The active compound is added to the propylene glycol and milled until a finely divided uniform mixture is formed. The polyethylene glycol 4000 is melted and the propylene glycol dispersion is added with stirring to obtain a suspension. The suspension is poured into molds, allowed to solidify and removed from the molds for packaging.

Example F Water-washable ointment Active Compound 1.4 w/w Lanolin alcohol 0.15 w/w Emulsifying wax NF 7.5% w/w glycerides 5.0% w/w Petrolatum 86.0% w/w -108- The ingredients are melted together and mixed well until the resulting ointment congeals.

Example G Oil-in-water cream Active Compound Benzyl alcohol Propylene glycol Polyethylene glycol 400 Petrolatum Stearyl alcohol Poloxamer 15 Water q.s.

Buffer to pH 10.0% w/w 4.0% w/w 10.0% w/w 10.0% w/w 20.0% w/w 10.0% w/w 10.0% w/w 100 7.0% w/w S. a

C.

S

In preparing the oil-in-water cream, water, propylene glycol and polyethylene glycol 400 are heated to about 70 to 80 C, followed by adding a mixture of petrolatum, stearyl alcohol and poloxamer and the mixture is stirred until homogeneous. The active compound in benzyl alcohol is added and the mixture is homogenized. The pH is then adjusted with a buffer to about 25 Example H Aqueous gel a

S

a. a a a

SQ

Active Compound Benzyl alcohol Hydroxyethyl cellulose B er oq.s.

Buffer to pH 10.0% w/w 4.0% w/w 3.0% w/w 100 7.0% w/w The aqueous gel is prepared by mixing the active compound, benzyl alcohol and adding the mixture to buffered water. Hydroxyethyl cellulose is then added with stirring until the mixture gels.

Having described the invention with reference to its preferred embodiments, it is to be understood that modifications within the scope of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art.

-109-

Claims (3)

1. A compound of the formula 11 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof 0 n Ar a a. 5 wherein n =1-3; R, and R 2 are independently CH 3 where m=

4-8, -CH 2 CH(OH)(CH 2 2 -CH 2 CH(F)(CH 2 2 -(C2)0(C2)-;or -(CH 2 2 CH=CHCH 2 Ar unsubstituted or mono-, or di-substituted phenyl wherein said substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, OCH 3 SO 2 CH 3 CF 3 amino,alkyl, and 3,4-dichioro; benzothiophenyl; benzofuranyl; naphthyl: diphenyl methyl; or 9-fluorene; 9C *a q S S a. a a a a. X 4 and X 5 are independently -OP(O)(OBn) 2 -CO 2 IJ; -SO 3 H; -SO 3 H; -0(CH 2 ),,CO 2 F[; -NHSQ2CH 3 -CONH(CH 2 ),COH; or -SO 2 NH(CH 2 ),CO 2 H; wherein s or X 4 and X 5 are independently X 6 0 (t 0 II H/ A NN C02H or NHR 5 o H 4Hr t;r 0 VX6 X6 0 SO 2 NR 4H t wherein U. a t 1-20 -H or -Ac .X 6 -CO 2 H; -NHSO 2 CH 3 -NHP(O)(OBn) 2 -NHP(O)(OH) 2 -OP(O)(OBn) 2 or -OP(O)(OH) 2 5 2. The compound according to claim I selected from the group consisting of: (3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N 1 4 -tetrahydro-5-(O-2-acetic acid)-hydroxy-2-( 1- pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-i ,2,3 ,4- tCEURhydro- 7 -(-2-acetic acid)-hydroxy-2-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; ,4- dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl.N 1 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-methanesulfonamido)-amino-2.( 1- pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; ,4-dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N 1-[1,2,3,4- tetrahydro-5-(N-methanesulfonamido)-amino.2. 1-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; (3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)Nmethyl-N 1-El ,2,3 4 -tetrahydro-5-(N2acetic acid)-carboxamido- 1-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-1-El ,2,3 ,4- tetrahydro-5-(N-2-acetic acid)-sulfonamido-2-( 1-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide; (3 4 -dichlorophenylyNmethyl-N 1-[i 2 3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-2-acetie acid)-carboxamido- 1-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyljacetamide; and 4 -dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl.N-1- 1, 2 3 4 -tetrahydro-7-(N-2-acetic acid)-sulfonamido-2.(l l-pyrrolidinyl)naphthyl]acetamide. 3. A compound according to claim 1 selected from the group consisting of: 2- I 4 -dichlorophenylacetamidoNmethylamino)-2 1-pyrrolidinyl)- 1,2,3 4 -tetrahydronaphthoxy] acetic acid; 2 2 -Dipheny1-Nmethy-N[(±-tran-2-( -pyrrolidinyl)-7-methoxy- 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphth- I -yl~jacetamide; 2 2 -Diphenyl-N-methybN(±)-trans..2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-hydroxy. 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2 2 -Nitro- 4 ,5-dichlorophenyl)NmethylN[(±)trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-nitro. 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)NmthyN[(±)trans-2 (I -pyrrolidinyl)-7-nitro- 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(3 4 -Dhslophen)Nmethy [(±)-trans2-(I -pyrrolidinyl)-7-io 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2 -(3 4 -Methlfonypnylyl)Nmethyll [±)trans2 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-n,-it- 234 buoyaboymtyl.mn] 1,,34tetrahydronaphth- -yl Iacetamide

202-(3 4 -Dichlorophenyl>NmethylpN- ±]-trans-2-[ 1 -pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N,Nbisb butroxyarymethyl)amino 12,3, 4 -tetrahydronaphth lyl aietaie 2 3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)-NmethypN- f I -pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N,Nbis- (caroxymethnymhyl)ainoj.. 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth-I lacetamide; 2 3 4 -Dichlorophenyl)Nmethy-N[(±)trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-(N- diethylphosphoramidato-amino). 1 2 3 4 -tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl] acetamide; 2-(3,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methy-N- I 1 -pyrrolidinyl]-7-[N-2- (di ethylphosphoryl)ethyl-aminoy- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- Il-yl I acetamide; 2-(3 ,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyl-N-[(±)-trans-2-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-6-methoxy-7-(N..benzyl. N-methylaminosulfonyl)- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2-(3 ,4-Dichlorophenyl)-N-methyhN[(±)-trans-2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-7-(N-benzyl-N- methylaminosulfonyl)- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydronaphth- 1 -yl]acetamide; 2 2 -Nitro-4,5-dichlorophenyl)-N-methylN.(±)trans2( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-indan- 1 ylacetamide; 2 2 -Nitro- 4 -trifluoromethylphenyl)-NmethylN.{(±)trans.2.( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-indan- 1 ylacetamide; 2,2-Diphenyl-N-methyl-N-[(±)-trans2.( 1-pyrrolidinyl)-indan- 1-yl]acetamide; and 2 -(4-Methyl sulfonylpheny1)-N-methypN- [(+)-trans-2 -(I1 -pyrrolidinyl)-indan- 1 ylacetamide. 4. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 1 in a acceptable carrier. 6 A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 2 in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. 6.ten an pharceaunt compaoitond opisn cam pon ofcai.i 8. A method of treating hyperalgesia in a patient comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of a compound of claim 1. 8. A method of treating hyperalgesia in a patient comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of a compound of claim 2. A method of treating hyperalgesia in a patient comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of claim 4. 11. A method of treating hyperalgesia in a patient comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of claim 12. A method of treating hyperalgesia in a patient comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of claim 6. 13. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 1 and an antibiotic, antiviral, antifungal, anti-inflammatory agent or a mixture thereof in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. *a 10 14. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 2 and an antibiotic, Santiviral, antifungal, anti-inflammatory agent or a mixture thereof in a pharmaceutically .acceptable carrier. 15. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 3 and an antibiotic, antiviral, antifungal, anti-inflammatory agent or a mixture thereof in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. a o aS